2023 Jeep Renegade

2023 R EN EGA DE | OWNER’S MANUAL
2023 RENEGADE
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
USA Canada
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une First Edition
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 23_BV_OM_EN_USC
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention
equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while
additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle
is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
common questions.
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE local Jeep® brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE. 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA) Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA) purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area drinking. Never drink and then drive.
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
23_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 7 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................55 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 70 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ................................................................................................................................ 116 5
6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 193 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 233 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................249 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................294
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................299
10
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................305
11
INTRODUCTION STEERING WHEEL............................................................... 23 Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................. 34

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ..............................23 Turn Signals ................................................................. 34
SYMBOLS KEY ....................................................................... 8 Heated Steering Wheel — Lane Change Assist..................................................... 34
ROLLOVER WARNING ......................................................... 8 If Equipped ..................................................................23 Courtesy Lights............................................................ 34
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......................... 8 SEATS ..................................................................................24 INTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................................. 35
SYMBOL GLOSSARY............................................................. 9 Manual Front Seats .....................................................24 Front Map/Reading Lights.......................................... 35
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment ...................................25 Dimmer Controls ........................................................ 35
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Adjustment (Front) — Rear Lights................................................................... 36
KEYS ....................................................................................13 If Equipped ...................................................................26 Dome Light Timing ...................................................... 36
Key Fob ........................................................................ 13 Heated Seats — If Equipped .......................................27 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .......................... 37
SENTRY KEY ........................................................................15 Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40 .....................27 Windshield Wiper Operation....................................... 37
IGNITION SWITCH ...............................................................15 Head Restraints ..........................................................28 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......................... 37
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .................................... 15 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ....................................29 Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................................... 38
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................................16 Introducing Voice Recognition ....................................29 Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped.................... 39
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 17 Basic Voice Commands...............................................29 CLIMATE CONTROLS ......................................................... 39
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................................ 17 Get Started...................................................................29 Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — Additional Information.................................................30 Functions ..................................................................... 39
If Equipped .................................................................. 17 MIRRORS ............................................................................. 30 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...................... 41
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped ......... 17 Inside Rearview Mirror ................................................30 Climate Voice Commands........................................... 41
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer Activation — Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ..................31 Operating Tips ............................................................ 42
If Equipped .................................................................. 18 Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal — If Equipped........31 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............................ 43
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped........... 18 Outside Mirrors ...........................................................31 Storage......................................................................... 43
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .................18 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .....................................32 USB/AUX Control ......................................................... 44
To Arm The System .................................................... 19 EXTERIOR LIGHTS............................................................... 32 Power Outlets .............................................................. 44
To Disarm The System ............................................... 19 Headlight Switch .........................................................32 Power Inverter — If Equipped...................................... 45
DOORS..................................................................................19 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped .........33 WINDOWS ........................................................................... 46
Manual Door Locks..................................................... 19 High Beams .................................................................33 Power Window Controls .............................................. 46
Power Door Locks ...................................................... 20 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — Automatic Window Features ...................................... 46
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry If Equipped ..................................................................33 Reset Auto-Up.............................................................. 46
(If Equipped) ............................................................... 20 Flash-To-Pass ...............................................................33 Window Lockout Switch .............................................. 47
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ........................ 22 Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .........................33 Wind Buffeting ............................................................ 47
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped ..... 22 Parking Lights ..............................................................34
Dead Lock Device — If Equipped ............................... 22 Headlight Time Delay .................................................34
Child Locks ................................................................. 22
DUAL PANE PANORAMIC POWER SUNROOF WITH ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) ......................68 STOP/START SYSTEM........................................................ 81
POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED........................................47 Onboard Diagnostic System Autostop Mode ............................................................ 81
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ............................. 47 (OBD II) Cybersecurity..................................................69 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop.... 81
Venting Sunroof .......................................................... 48 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode ............ 81
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade .............. 48 PROGRAMS .........................................................................69 To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System............ 82
Pinch Protect Feature ................................................. 48 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System............ 82
Sunroof Maintenance ................................................. 48 STARTING AND OPERATING System Malfunction .................................................... 82
HOOD ...................................................................................48 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ................. 82
To Open The Hood ...................................................... 48 STARTING THE ENGINE...................................................... 70 Cruise Control ............................................................. 82
To Close The Hood ...................................................... 49 Tip Start Feature .........................................................70 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped ............ 83
LIFTGATE ..............................................................................50 If Engine Fails To Start ...............................................70 PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
Unlock/Open The Liftgate .......................................... 50 Cold Weather Operation..............................................71 IF EQUIPPED ...................................................................... 91
Lock/Close The Liftgate.............................................. 51 Extended Park Starting ...............................................71 ParkSense Sensors ..................................................... 91
Cargo Area Features ................................................... 51 After Starting — Warming Up The Engine ...................71 ParkSense Warning Display........................................ 91
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ...........................53 Stopping The Engine....................................................71 ParkSense Display ...................................................... 91
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped..................71 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ............................ 94
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......................71
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB).......................................... 72
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System .............. 94
INSTRUMENT PANEL Cleaning The ParkSense System ............................... 94
Auto Park Brake...........................................................73 ParkSense System Usage Precautions...................... 94
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................................55 SafeHold.......................................................................73 Side Distance Warning (SDW) System....................... 95
Instrument Cluster Descriptions S ......................... 57 Brake Service Mode ....................................................74 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ....................................57 9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ........................... 74 SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .................................................... 97
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls ... 57 Gear Selector ...............................................................75 Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Oil Change Reset S .................................................. 58 Gear Ranges ................................................................75 Assist System............................................................... 97
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ................... 58 Transmission Limp Home Mode.................................78 Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
TRIP COMPUTER .................................................................61 Ignition Park Interlock Operation ..................................................................... 98
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES...........61 (Keyless Vehicle)..........................................................78 Exiting The Parking Space .......................................... 99
Red Warning Lights..................................................... 61 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) System ....78 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ..........................................101
Yellow Warning Lights................................................. 64 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE...........................................................78 LaneSense Operation ...............................................101
Yellow Indicator Lights................................................ 66 Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)..............................................78 Turning LaneSense On Or Off...................................101
Green Indicator Lights ................................................ 67 SELEC-TERRAIN ..................................................................79 LaneSense Warning Message..................................102
White Indicator Lights................................................. 68 Mode Selection Guide .................................................79 Changing LaneSense Status ....................................104
Blue Indicator Lights................................................... 68 ACTIVE GRILLE SHUTTERS — IF EQUIPPED.....................80 REAR BACK UP CAMERA ................................................105
Gray Indicator Lights................................................... 68 POWER STEERING.............................................................. 80 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...............................................106
VEHICLE LOADING .......................................................... 106 ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — Connected Services Roadside Assistance FAQs ....189
Certification Label..................................................... 106 IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 152 Connected Services Send & Go FAQs —
TRAILER TOWING............................................................. 107 Android Auto™ S .................................................... 152 If Equipped ................................................................189
Common Towing Definitions .................................... 107 Apple CarPlay® S .................................................. 154 Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs ...............189
Trailer Hitch Classification........................................ 108 Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And Connected Services Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Tricks ......................................................................... 156 FAQs — If Equipped ..................................................189
Ratings)...................................................................... 109 NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED (UCONNECT 4C NAV Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start FAQs ...190
Trailer And Tongue Weight ....................................... 109 ONLY) ............................................................................... 157 Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights FAQs...190
Towing Requirements .............................................. 109 Operating Navigation ............................................... 157 Connected Services Account
Towing Tips................................................................ 112 Where To? ................................................................ 158 FAQs — If Equipped ...................................................190
RECREATIONAL TOWING ................................................ 112 View Map .................................................................. 169 Data Collection & Privacy..........................................192
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle .......... 112 Information ............................................................... 175 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ..................192
Recreational Towing ................................................. 112 Emergency ................................................................ 176 Regulatory And Safety Information ..........................192
DRIVING TIPS ................................................................... 113 Map Updates ............................................................ 176
On-Road Driving Tips ................................................ 113 SiriusXM® Travel Link ............................................. 177 SAFETY
Off-Road Driving Tips ................................................ 113 SiriusXM® Traffic Plus ............................................. 177
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — SAFETY FEATURES ...........................................................193
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................193
MULTIMEDIA IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 177
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...................194
Is My Vehicle Connected? ........................................ 177
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ..................................................... 116 Introduction To Connected Vehicle Services ......... 178 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ......................................199
CYBERSECURITY ............................................................. 116 Getting Started With Connected Vehicle Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped ............199
UCONNECT SETTINGS...................................................... 116 Services .................................................................... 179 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Customer Programmable Features ........................ 117 Using SiriusXM Guardian™ ..................................... 180 Operation — If Equipped ...........................................202
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION............................................ 129 Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™ Account ............. 188 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ................205
System Overview ...................................................... 129 CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ....................................... 188 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................................208
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ............................................. 131 Connected Services SOS FAQs — If Equipped ....... 188 Occupant Restraint Systems ....................................208
Safety And General Information............................... 131 Connected Services Remote Door Lock/Unlock Important Safety Precautions...................................209
UCONNECT MODES.......................................................... 132 FAQs .......................................................................... 188 Seat Belt Systems .....................................................209
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ............................... 132 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ..................214
Radio Mode .............................................................. 132 Child Restraints ........................................................221
Media Mode ............................................................. 141
Phone Mode ............................................................. 143
SAFETY TIPS ..................................................................... 230 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) .. 248 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
Transporting Passengers.......................................... 230 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)..................................... 248 TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...................................................290
Transporting Pets...................................................... 230 Treadwear..................................................................291
Connected Vehicles .................................................. 230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Traction Grades .........................................................291
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Temperature Grades .................................................291
Vehicle ...................................................................... 231 SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................ 249 STORING THE VEHICLE ....................................................291
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Maintenance Plan..................................................... 249 BODYWORK ......................................................................292
The Vehicle ................................................................ 232 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................................ 253 Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......................292
Exhaust Gas ............................................................. 232 1.3L Turbo Engine .................................................... 253 Body And Underbody Maintenance..........................292
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ..................................... 232 Checking Oil Level .................................................... 254 Preserving The Bodywork .........................................292
Adding Washer Fluid................................................. 254 INTERIORS ........................................................................293
Maintenance-Free Battery ...................................... 254
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Pressure Washing..................................................... 255
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................................293
Plastic And Coated Parts ..........................................293
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..................................... 233 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................................ 255 Leather Surfaces .......................................................293
SOS AND ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .................. 233 Engine Oil ................................................................. 255 Glass Surfaces ..........................................................293
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED ......... 236 Engine Oil Filter......................................................... 256
Preparations For Jacking ......................................... 236 Engine Air Cleaner Filter .......................................... 256
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ......................... 237 Air Conditioner Maintenance ................................... 256
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Jacking Instructions .................................................. 237 Body Lubrication....................................................... 256 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) .....................294
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ................................ 240 Windshield Wiper Blades ........................................ 257 BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................................294
Tire Service Kit Storage S ..................................... 240 Exhaust System ....................................................... 258 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS...............294
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation........... 240 Cooling System ......................................................... 258 Torque Specifications ...............................................294
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions.......................... 241 Brake System............................................................ 260 FUEL REQUIREMENTS......................................................295
Replacing The Sealant.............................................. 241 Automatic Transmission .......................................... 261 1.3L Turbo Engine.....................................................295
JUMP STARTING............................................................... 242 Fuses ......................................................................... 262 Reformulated Gasoline.............................................295
Preparations For Jump Start .................................... 242 Bulb Replacement .................................................... 268 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................................295
Jump Starting Procedure.......................................... 242 TIRES ................................................................................. 278 E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .....................295
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED ............... 243 Tire Safety Information............................................. 278 CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ..................296
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ........................................ 244 Tires — General Information .................................... 284 Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ......................................... 245 Tire Types .................................................................. 287 In Gasoline.................................................................296
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ........................................... 245 Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................................ 288 Materials Added To Fuel ...........................................296
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ..................................... 246 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................................... 288 Fuel System Cautions ...............................................296
Front–Wheel Drive (FWD)......................................... 247 Snow Traction Devices ............................................ 289 FLUID CAPACITIES............................................................297
Four–Wheel Drive (4WD).......................................... 247 Tire Rotation Recommendations ............................ 290 ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...............................297
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped...................... 247 CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .............................298
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............................................ 299 WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................301

Roadside Assistance ................................................ 299 MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................301
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR FCA US LLC Customer Center .................................. 300 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................301
VEHICLE ............................................................................ 299 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .......................... 300 In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........301
Prepare For The Appointment .................................. 299 Mexico ....................................................................... 300 In Canada...................................................................302
Prepare A List ............................................................ 299 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ........................... 300 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................302
Be Reasonable With Requests ................................ 299 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS.......................302
Impaired (TDD/TTY) .................................................. 301 GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................303
Service Contract ...................................................... 301
INTRODUCTION
1
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use
only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure
you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces.
Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
collision Ú page 113.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible
way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
SYMBOLS KEY Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision,
These statements are against operating procedures that rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
WARNING!
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
These statements are against procedures that could
CAUTION!
result in damage to your vehicle.
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation,
NOTE:
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the
TIP:
product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on a
particular feature.
Rollover Warning Label
FOOTNOTE Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts
topic. could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling
injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
ROLLOVER WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light 1
your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol Ú page 61. Ú page 63
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current Hood Open Warning Light
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear. Ú page 63
Red Warning Lights
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Air Bag Warning Light Ú page 63
Ú page 61
Oil Pressure Warning Light

Brake Warning Light Ú page 63
Ú page 62
Oil Pressure Sensor Failure Warning Light

Battery Charge Warning Light Ú page 63
Ú page 62
Oil Temperature Warning Light

Door Open Warning Light Ú page 63
Ú page 62
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light Ú page 63
Ú page 62
Transmission Fault Warning Light

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light Ú page 63
Ú page 62
10
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 64 Ú page 64
Audio System Failure Warning Light Service 4WD Warning Light

Electric Park Brake Warning Light Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Icy Road Condition Warning Light Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Keyless Enter n’ Go/Service Passive Entry Warning Light Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
LaneSense Warning Light Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light

Low Fuel Warning Light Transmission Temperature Warning Light

Service LaneSense Warning Light 4WD Over Temperature Warning Light

11
Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light 1
4WD Lock Indicator Light

Ú page 66 Green Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light

Dusk Sensor Malfunction Indicator Light Ú page 67
Ú page 66
Front Fog Indicator Light

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Indicator Light Ú page 67
Ú page 66
Hazard Warning Indicator Lights

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light Ú page 67
Ú page 67
Parking/Headlight On Indicator Light

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Indicator Light Ú page 67
Ú page 67
Sport Mode Indicator Light

Fuel Cutoff Failure Indicator Light Ú page 67
Ú page 67
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light

Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light Ú page 67
Ú page 64
12
Green Indicator Lights Blue Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights High Beam Indicator Light

White Indicator Lights Gray Indicator Lights
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light Cruise Control Ready/Canceled Indicator Light
Idle Coasting Indicator Light

Ú page 68
Light Sensor Failure Indicator Light

Ú page 68
Speed Warning Indicator Light

Ú page 68
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS To Unlock/Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
KEY F OB unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five seconds to 2
unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To lock all the doors
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports and the liftgate, push the lock button once.
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped),
and the illuminated entry features will be activated. When
and Panic button operation. The key fob allows you to lock
the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the
or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to
horn will chirp.
approximately 66 ft (20 m). In some conditions, this
distance can be reduced or increased. The key fob does All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the of the unlock button within Uconnect Settings
system. The key fob also contains an emergency key, Ú page 116.
which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
Key Left Vehicle Feature — If Equipped
NOTE:
Key Fob If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
 The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
fob is located next to a metallic object, mobile phone, 1 — Unlock START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
laptop, wireless charging pad, or other electronic 2 — Remote Start (If Equipped) Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
device. This may result in poor performance. along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and visual
3 — Emergency Key
 If the key fob’s battery is near depletion, the key fob alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
4 — Lock
performance can be reduced.
5 — Panic The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push  The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted the vehicle to detect a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to feature will not activate until all of the doors are closed.
the instrument cluster, which will display directions to  These alerts will not be activated in situations where
follow Ú page 303. either the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key
fob inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals are blocked.
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob 2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing down,
and locate the small rectangular gap on the left side
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery. between the housing and the back cover of the key
NOTE: fob. Insert a small flat-head screwdriver, or a coin into
 Customers are recommended to use a battery the gap, then rotate downward to loosen the halves.
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery Gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart making
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery sure not to damage the seal during removal.
dimensions.
 Perchlorate material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
 Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back Key Fob Battery Replacement
housing or the printed circuit board.
6. Replace the battery cap, then reassemble the key fob
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the case by snapping the two halves together.
emergency key release (1) on the back of the key fob
and pulling the emergency key out with your other WARNING!
hand.
 The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
Separating Case With A Coin hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
3. Remove the cap covering the key fob battery. cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
4. Insert the small flat-bladed tool into the gap next to
the battery and pry the battery upward to remove.  If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
5. When replacing the battery, match the (+) sign on the placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
battery to the (+) sign on the inside of the battery clip, medical attention.
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new  Keep new and used batteries away from children. If
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery the battery compartment does not close securely,
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with stop using the product and keep it away from chil-
rubbing alcohol. dren.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Programming And Requesting Additional SENTRY KEY All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key Fobs
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized NOTE:
Programming the key fob may be performed by an vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system A key fob that has not been programmed is also
authorized dealer. does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is considered an invalid key Ú page 303.
NOTE: automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
2
 Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
IGNITION SWITCH
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
 Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
WARNING! and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
off in two seconds if an incorrect key fob is used to start passenger compartment.
 Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock the engine.
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. The START/STOP ignition button has three operating
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, modes: OFF, ON, and RUN.
 For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Igni- the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
tion, always remember to place the ignition in the a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check,
NOTE:
OFF position when exiting the vehicle. it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located inside the
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it cargo area and the liftgate is opened.
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
being shut off after two seconds.
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed. If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
NOTE:
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
 When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho- by an authorized dealer.
rized dealer.
 Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match CAUTION!
the vehicle locks.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
 It is not mandatory to replace the key fob if a new emer-
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of START/STOP Ignition Button
gency key is needed, and vice versa.
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
The push button ignition can be placed in the following

positions: CAUTION!
OFF An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors
 The engine is stopped.
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
 No electrical devices are available.
ON
For information on normal starting, see Ú page 70.
 The vehicle is not running.
 Some electrical devices (power locks, alarm, etc.) are
still available. REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
RUN This system uses the key fob to start the engine
Starting The Ignition With Depleted Key Fob Battery conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
 Driving mode.
maintaining security. The system has a range
 All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
WARNING! of approximately 328 ft (100 m).
controls, heated seats, etc.).
NOTE:  When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,
If the ignition state/mode does not change with the push from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
of a button, the key fob may have a low or depleted conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
battery. In this situation, a backup method can be used to access to an unlocked vehicle. NOTE:
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce
opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is this range.
START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
ignition. could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should WARNING!
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.  Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
a location accessible to children, and do not leave Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A child could serious injury or death when inhaled.
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi- controls could cause serious injury or death.
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
HOW TO U SE R EMOTE S TART  Panic button not pushed NOTE:

 System not disabled from previous Remote Start event  The message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob  Vehicle Security system indicator flashing Button” will show in the instrument cluster display until
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the  Ignition in OFF position you push the START/STOP ignition button.
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
 Fuel level meets minimum requirement  To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
 Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
2
cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts  Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
the engine off.
WARNING! REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
NOTE:
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED
 With Remote Start, the engine will only run for confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
15 minutes. When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
 Remote Start can only be used twice. temperature is 40°F (4.4°C) or below, the system will
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.
 If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the serious injury or death when inhaled.
The time is dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
 Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the the timer expires, the system will automatically adjust the
 The parking lights will turn on and remain on during settings depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
Remote Start mode. Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next section
controls could cause serious injury or death.
 For security, power window and power sunroof opera- for detailed operation.
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in
the Remote Start mode. TO EXIT R EMOTE START MODE REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
 The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start I F E QUIPPED
a third cycle. system, push and release the START/STOP ignition button When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
All of the following conditions must be met before the while pressing the brake pedal prior to the end of the will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
engine will remote start: 15 minute cycle. steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on
 Gear selector in PARK The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the if selected in the Comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or if Settings Ú page 116. The vehicle will adjust the climate
 Doors closed
the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. control settings depending on the outside ambient
 Hood closed Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the temperature.
 Liftgate closed climate controls will resume previously set operations
 Hazard switch off (temperature, blower control, etc.).
 Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
 Battery at an acceptable charge level
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped

The climate controls will be automatically adjusted to the
REMOTE START W INDSHIELD W IPER VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on the
DE-I CER ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
outside ambient temperature. This will occur until the hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition for
When Remote Start Is active and the outside ambient
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security system
temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), the Windshield
climate controls will resume their previous settings. is armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
release are disabled. If something triggers the system, the
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
Vehicle Security system will provide the following audible
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue
 In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.4°C) or below, the and visible signals:
Ú page 303.
climate settings will default to maximum heat, with  The horn will pulse
fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer REMOTE START C ANCEL MESSAGE —  The turn signals will flash
expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
 In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.4°C) to 78°F I F E QUIPPED  The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will
flash
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
One of the following messages will display in the NOTE:
settings selected by the driver.
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
 In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or above, the start or exits Remote Start prematurely:  The Vehicle Security system is factory adjusted to stan-
climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level Mode, dards from different countries.
with Recirculation on.  Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
 The Vehicle Security system is a complementary secu-
 Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open rity system developed to hinder the occurrence of
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see Ú page 39.  Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low vehicle theft and prevent vandalism. It does not
 Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open prevent the theft of your vehicle; the system is a deter-
NOTE:  Remote Start Canceled — Too Cold rent.
These features will stay on through the duration of Remote
 Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired  The Vehicle Security system does not monitor glass
Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
 Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset breakage or the movement of objects or people inside
The climate control settings will change if manually
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in the vehicle. The alarm does not intervene in the case of
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote Start
the ON/RUN position. vehicle tilt variations when it is parked.
mode, and exit automatic override. This includes the OFF
button on the climate controls, which will turn the system
off.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously All doors and the liftgate can be programmed to unlock on
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle the use of one of the front door interior handles within the
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system: Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in Uconnect Settings Ú page 116.
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
position. door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery 2
vehicle:
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
 Push the lock button on the interior power door remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
open. occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
 Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry To completely disable the alarm (e.g. in the case of long
door handle with a valid key fob available in the inactivity of the vehicle), lock the doors by turning the
same exterior zone Ú page 20. emergency key in the exterior door lock cylinder.
 Push the lock button on the key fob. NOTE: Manual Door Lock
3. If any doors are open, close them. If the batteries in the key fob discharge in the event of a
failure to the system, place the ignition in the ON/RUN NOTE:
TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM position to turn the alarm off. The manual lock knob unlocks each individual door sepa-
rately.
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods: DOORS WARNING!
 Push the unlock button on the key fob.
 Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door
MANUAL D OOR L OCKS  For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
Ú page 20. The door locks can be manually locked from inside the well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
 Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door,
system. rotate the door lock knob on each door trim panel forward  When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
NOTE: until the lock indicator is shown. To unlock the front doors, from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Always make
pull the inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
 The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden. To key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. Unsu-
Vehicle Security system. unlock the rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
 When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior lock indicator is hidden. If the door lock button is locked personal injuries or death.
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. (lock indicator visible) when you shut the door, the door (Continued)
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your will remain locked. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the inside the vehicle before closing the door.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the To Unlock From The Driver's Side Or Passenger’s Side
WARNING! Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry system if equipped With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with Ú page 20. either front door handle, grab the door handle to unlock
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to the door automatically.
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- E NTRY (I F EQUIPPED)
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
gear selector. vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This feature allows
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having
a location accessible to children, and do not leave to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the NOTE:
vehicle.  Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings Ú page 116.
 The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
POWER D OOR L OCKS Passive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
The power door lock switches are located on each front phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices NOTE:
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors, may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Passive Entry system from locking and unlocking the  Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when
liftgate and fuel door. you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
vehicle.
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
 If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door system Ú page 116.
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting  All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
in a slower response time. handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
 The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the unlock preference setting.
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle. To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
 If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
and, if equipped, will arm the Vehicle Security system. which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
Power Door Lock Switch
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
in any Passive Entry vehicle: door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
 A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob  The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
while a door is open. battery is depleted.
 A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
handle while a door is open. The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the 2
 A lock request is made by the door panel switch while electronic liftgate release handle. With a valid Passive
the door is open. Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors electronic liftgate release handle to open.
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle and it
does not detect any Passive Entry key fobs outside the Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
vehicle, then the vehicle will unlock and alert the NOTE:
customer. DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
NOTE: handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will
not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions
are true:
 The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
Liftgate Release Handle
 Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed. To Lock The Liftgate
 There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the If vehicle is equipped with a Passive Entry lock button:
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle. liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located to the
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate right of the electronic liftgate release handle.
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft NOTE:
(1.5 m) of either front door handle, push the Passive Entry NOTE: The liftgate Passive Entry lock button (if equipped) will lock
lock button located on the outside door handle to lock the  After pushing the door handle button, you must wait the liftgate and the doors. The liftgate unlock feature is
vehicle doors and liftgate. two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, built into the electronic liftgate release.
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
Emergency Unlocking Driver Door AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — Disarming The Device
If the key fob battery is low or depleted, the emergency key  The device will automatically disarm by pushing the
can be used to unlock the driver side door lock cylinder.
I F E QUIPPED unlock button on the key fob. For vehicles equipped
To release the emergency key, proceed as follows: When the auto door lock feature is enabled, if all of the with Passive Entry, the device will also disarm by using
doors are closed properly, the door locks will lock the driver or passenger Passive Entry door handle to
1. Slide the emergency key release button to the side. unlock and open the door.
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 12 mph
2. Remove the emergency key from the key fob. (20 km/h). The auto door lock feature is enabled/disabled  Placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position will disarm
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 116. the system.
NOTE:
The emergency key can be inserted into the door lock
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK O N EXIT CHILD L OCKS
cylinder from either direction Ú page 303.
F EATURE — I F EQUIPPED To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
WARNING! the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
If Auto Unlock is enabled within Uconnect Settings Child-Protection Door Lock system.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with Ú page 116, this feature will unlock all the doors when
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK. To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the
number of reasons. A child or others could be DEAD LOCK DEVICE — IF E QUIPPED lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is
severely injured or killed. Children should be warned engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
The Dead Lock Device is a safety device that prevents the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal, or the
use of the internal door handles of the vehicle and the unlocked position.
gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
power door lock switch.
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A This device prevents the doors from opening within the
child could start the vehicle, operate power windows, passenger compartment.
other controls, or move the vehicle. Arming The Dead Lock Device
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-  The device works on all doors and requires two pushes
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause of the lock button on the key fob. For vehicles equipped
them to be severely injured or killed with Passive Entry, the device will also work by pushing
the lock button on the driver’s or passenger’s side exte-
rior door handle.
 The arming of the device is indicated by three flashes
of the turn signals.
 The device does not operate if one or more doors are Child-Protection Door Lock Location
not properly closed.
NOTE: HEATED S TEERING WHEEL —

 When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can only be opened by using the
I F E QUIPPED
outside door handle even though the inside door lock The steering wheel contains a heating element
is in the unlocked position. that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
 After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
2
certain it is in the unlocked position. wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an average of
 After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. This time
always test the door from the inside to make certain it will vary based on environmental temperatures. The
is in the locked position. heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
 For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the Tilt/Telescoping Lever on when the steering wheel is already warm.
lock/unlock knob to the unlocked position, lower the To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/telescoping The heated steering wheel control button is located in your
window, and open the door with the outside door lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering vehicle’s touchscreen or on the instrument panel.
handle. column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as  Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the heating element on.
WARNING!
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.  Press the heated steering wheel button a second time
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. To lock the steering column in position, pull the tilt/ to turn the heating element off.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from telescoping lever upward until fully engaged. NOTE:
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel
engaged (locked). WARNING! to operate.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
STEERING WHEEL Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
Ú page 17.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located
below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
WARNING! MANUAL F RONT S EATS 1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar

2 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever (If Equipped)
 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
WARNING! 3 — Recline Lever
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-  Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
for long periods. the seat only while the vehicle is parked. move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
 Do not place anything on the steering wheel that  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. Height Adjustment
wheel covers of any type or material. This may cause In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the steering wheel heater to overheat. be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull
only when the vehicle is parked.
upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
SEATS Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward

downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Manual Recline Adjustment
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the
Adjustment To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
vehicle.
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
WARNING! is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in Fold-Forward Front Passenger Seat —
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or If Equipped
killed.
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a surface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to the instrument panel). The fold-forward seatback has a
to be seriously injured or killed. softback surface that you can use as a work surface when
the seat is folded forward and the vehicle is not in motion.
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment Levers

NOTE:  Prior to folding the rear seat, you must secure the rear Partial Enlargement Of The Cargo Area
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from armrest in the upright position.
Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area allows you
the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an  You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
to carry a single passenger on the right side of the rear
extended period of time. This is normal and by simply from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
seat, while the enlargement of the right side allows you to
unfolding the seats to the open position, over time the an extended period of time. This is normal and by
carry two passengers.
seat cushion will return to its normal shape. simply unfolding the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape. Proceed as follows: 2
WARNING! 1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped) Ú page 51.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is 2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could  It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people 3. Move the seat belts to the outboard side of the seat
cause you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while the
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously and rest them on the seat belt guide.
vehicle is parked.
injured or killed. 4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the left or right
rear seatback completely forward.
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
MANUAL R EAR S EAT ADJUSTMENT that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
WARNING!  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision. Cargo Area Enlargement
Folding both sides of the rear seat provides additional
storage in the rear cargo area.
Split Rear Seats
Proceed as follows:
The split rear seat has the ability to fold flat which
increases the storage of the rear cargo area. 1. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
NOTE: 2. Move the seat belts to the outboard side of the seat. Rear Seat Release
 Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may be necessary 3. Pull the seatback release lever to fold both sides of 1 — Seat Belt Guide
to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Be the rear seatbacks completely forward. 2 — Seatback Release Lever
sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward, this will allow the rear seat to fold down
easily.
Seatback Repositioning Some models may be equipped with a power driver's seat
and/or power passenger seat. The power seat switch and
NOTE: power seat recliner switch are located on the outboard
If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback side of the seat near the floor. Use the power seat switch
from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to adjust seat height, angle, or forward/rearward position.
to its proper position. Use the power seat recline switch to adjust the angle of
1. Move the seat belts to the seat belt guides on the the seatback.
top edge of the seat to ensure the seatbacks Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
properly latch.
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back until they lock the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in
on both the latches. Verify the red notches are no the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
longer visible on the release lever. If the red notches desired position has been reached. Power Seat Recliner Switch
are visible, the seatback is not secure.
Height Adjustment
POWER A DJUSTMENT (F RONT) — WARNING!
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
I F EQUIPPED upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will  Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached. which could cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
switch and the front of the seat cushion will move in the death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
direction of the switch.  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
Reclining The Seatback shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward. could result in serious injury or death.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
Power Seat Switch the switch when the desired position has been reached. CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar Adjustment— If Equipped  Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
WARNING!
heating elements off.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. If the operator presses the heated seat button a second  Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
time to turn on the LO setting, the display will change from insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
HI to LO, and the LO level setting will turn off automatically This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
after 45 minutes. a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of 2
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately the seat.
145 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after
UNFOLDING THE REAR ARMREST
approximately 60 minutes. 40/20/40
NOTE: Pull the rear armrest tab to release it from the seat and
The engine must be running for the heated seats to pull forward.
operate.
Power Lumbar Switch The timing values may vary the heated seat settings
NOTE: depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Power seat adjustments are only allowed when the For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
ignition is in the ON position, and for about 30 minutes Ú page 17.
after it is placed in the OFF position.
WARNING!
HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED
 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
The heated seat buttons are located in your because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
vehicle’s touchscreen or on the instrument spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
panel. tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even Armrest Tab Location
You can choose between two heating levels: at low temperatures, especially if used for long
 Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting periods of time.
on. (Continued)
 Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head

WARNING! restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into posi- downward on the head restraint.
tion the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
HEAD R ESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
Fold Center Armrest Forward restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a rear Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
armrest with cupholders. head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
 All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer.
of a crash.
 Head restraints should never be adjusted while the WARNING!
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could  All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a
cause serious injury or death in the event of a colli- vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
sion. are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize
Rear Armrest With Cupholders the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
 Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
Front Head Restraints vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
Your vehicle is equipped with front driver and passenger restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause
head restraints. serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
Rear Head Restraints UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION BASIC VOICE COMMANDS

Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard head The following basic Voice Commands can be given at any
restraints and one center head restraint for its rear I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION point while using your Uconnect system.
passengers. The rear head restraints can be raised or
lowered. When the center seat is being occupied, the head Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session. 2
no occupants in the center seat, the head restraint can be  “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver. Recognition (VR) system.
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
restraint. Recognition system’s status.
To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button,
located at the base of the head restraint, and push GET S TARTED
downward on the head restraint. The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
 Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display  Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the VR
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps Command.
menu of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the  You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
Adjustment Buttons Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command
with 8.4-inch display system. from the current category.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head
restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer.
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support: NOTE:

 US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/ The mirror will automatically release in the event of heavy
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827 contact with a passenger.
 Canadian residents visit https://www.driveucon- Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call:
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
1-877-324-9091
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the
MIRRORS left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the
I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR button does not illuminate.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons Manual Mirror — If Equipped
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call and Send Or The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
Receive A Text right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, through the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles
Media, Navigation And Climate Functions behind you can be reduced by moving the lever under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle).
The mirror should be adjusted while the lever under the
ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all Dimming Mirror
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
NOTE:
Radio Inc.
This feature is disabled when the vehicle’s transmission
Uconnect System Support: has been placed in REVERSE.
 US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
 Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 Mirror Adjustment
(French)
I LLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS — OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN

I F EQUIPPED SIGNAL — IF EQUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
visors and lift the mirror cover. lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the upper outer
corner of each mirror.
2
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the
corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the
vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also
activate these LEDs.
Sliding Sun Visor OUTSIDE MIRRORS
3. Slide out the sun visor extender for even more side
coverage toward the rear.
Power Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
panel.
To adjust the mirror, rotate the mirror selection switch to
Lift Cover For Mirror the left or to the right and then push the mirror adjustment
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature — switch in the four directions indicated by arrows.
If Equipped NOTE:
To extend the sun visor, proceed as follows:  To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN position.
1. Place the sun visor against the door glass by
 The power mirror switches will remain active for up to
detaching it from the hook and turning it toward the
three minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF
side window.
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
2. Slide the visor along the rod to provide coverage more Using The Extender feature.
to the rear.  Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the control to the
neutral position to avoid accidental movements.
Folding Mirror
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot
forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has
three detent positions: full forward, normal and full
rearward.
Power Mirror Switch Headlight Switch

1 — Mirror Selector Switch 1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch 2 — Ambient Lighting Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Front Fog Light Switch
Manual Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped
To adjust the exterior mirrors, push the corners of the
Folding Exterior Mirror
Turning on the headlights will illuminate the instrument
mirrors until the desired alignment is obtained.
HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED cluster and the controls located on the instrument panel.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. NOTE:
This feature can be activated whenever you On vehicles sold in Canada, both the rear position lights
turn on the Rear Window Defroster Ú page 39. and Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on when the
headlight switch is rotated to the O (off) position.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The headlight switch controls the
operation of the headlights, side marker and parking
Manual Adjustment Mirror lights, daytime running lights, fog lights and the dimming
of the instrument cluster and interior lighting.
DAYTIME RUNNING L IGHTS (DRLS) — FLASH-T O-P ASS

I F EQUIPPED You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs), if enabled through
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
Uconnect Settings, will turn on when the instrument
until the lever is released.
cluster is on and remain on unless the headlights are
High Beam And Turn Signal Controls 2
turned on or the instrument cluster is switched off. AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED
NOTE: NOTE:
The headlights must be on for the high beams to activate. This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
 For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAM HEADLAMP rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent
lights are turned on. (AUTO position) for automatic headlight operation. To turn
 On vehicles sold in Canada, both the rear position CONTROL — I F EQUIPPED the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of
lights and Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system the AUTO position.
when the headlight switch is rotated to the O (off) posi- provides increased forward lighting at night by NOTE:
tion. automatically controlling the high beams through the use The ignition must be in the ON/RUN or START position
 On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may of a camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or switches from high beams to low beams until the Dusk Sensor
on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning approaching vehicle is out of view. There is an infrared LED sensor that works with the rain
lights are activated). sensor, located on the windshield. It detects changes in
NOTE:
light intensity outside the vehicle, based on the sensitivity
HIGH BEAMS  The multifunction lever must be in the high beam posi- of light set by using the menu on the display or on the
tion in order to activate the Automatic High Beams. Uconnect system.
To activate the high beam headlights, push the
multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the  The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the amount of
vehicle), and an indicator will illuminate in the instrument turned on or off using the Uconnect system
external light required for controlling the lighting.
cluster display. Ú page 116.
 Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights To turn the dusk sensor on, rotate the headlight switch to
To deactivate the high beam headlights, pull the the AUTO position. To turn it off, rotate the headlight
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the switch to a position other than AUTO.
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
vehicle).
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera NOTE:
lens will cause the system to function improperly. The dusk sensor can only be activated with the ignition in
When set to AUTO, the system automatically turns the the ON/RUN position.
headlights on or off based on ambient light levels.
PARKING LIGHTS FRONT FOG L IGHTS — IF EQUIPPED Cornering Lights

The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at
Rotate the headlight switch to the first detent to turn on The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch. night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light
the parking lights. The parking light indicator in the incorporated in the front fog light will illuminate on the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or the turn
HEADLIGHT TIME D ELAY signal indicator is on. It can be activated through the
Uconnect system Ú page 116.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit TURN SIGNALS
area.
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
The time delay of the headlights is programmable turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds within Uconnect cluster display flash to show proper operation.
Settings Ú page 116.
Headlight Delay Activation
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF Fog Light Switch Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
position while the headlights are still on. The delay interval moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
begins when the headlight switch is turned off from the five times then automatically turn off.
the low beam headlights and push the fog light button on
low beam position. the headlight switch. The front fog lights feature is COURTESY LIGHTS
If the headlight switch is in AUTO and the headlights were latching, which means that every time that the button is
on before the ignition was turned off, the delay interval pressed and the fog lights are activated, the vehicle The courtesy lights feature allows you to activate the low
begins automatically. memorizes the request and reactivates the front fog lights beam, parking lights, and sidemarker lights for 25 seconds
every time that the parking lights or low beams are active. when the vehicle is unlocked (through the key fob or the
Headlight Delay Deactivation
To deactivate the feature, push the front fog button again. Passive Entry door handles [if equipped]). The courtesy
The feature is disabled by turning on the headlights, the The front fog lights are deactivated each time the parking lights feature can be activated or deactivated through the
parking lights or by placing the ignition in the RUN position. or low beam lights are deactivated or the ignition is placed Uconnect Settings. When a door is open with the feature
If you shut off the lights before the ignition is turned on, in the OFF position. active, the activation of the lights is extended for five
they will turn off in the normal manner. seconds. The feature is disabled when the vehicle is locked
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
or when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: when the fog lights are turned on.
The lights must be turned off within two minutes of placing NOTE:
the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature. The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or
parking lights on. Selecting the high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
INTERIOR LIGHTS DIMMER C ONTROLS

Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward
FRONT MAP/R EADING L IGHTS to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
The courtesy lights are mounted between the sun visors located in the overhead console, door handle lights, lower
above the rearview mirror. The light switches are used to instrument panel lights, door map pocket lights, and
turn the lights on or off. cubby bin lights. 2
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the
instrument panel dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the instrument
panel. The instrument panel dimmer has two positions at
Courtesy Light Switches the top of the thumb wheel. The first top detent position
puts the interior lighting into daytime mode and the very
1 — Left Switch top detent position illuminates all the interior lights. The
2 — Right Switch bottom detent position of the instrument panel dimmer
dims the internal backlights to their lowest dimmable
setting and disables the interior lights.
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver or
passenger light switch.
NOTE:
Driver’s Courtesy Lights
 Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior
lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from
discharging once the doors are closed.
 If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off
after approximately 15 minutes after the ignition is in
the OFF position.
Dimmer Controls
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control Switch
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control Switch
REAR LIGHTS Timing Entering The Vehicle

The dome lights illuminate in the following ways:
On vehicles equipped with a sunroof, there are two interior
lights located above the grab handles of the rear doors.  When the doors are unlocked, the dome light will illumi-
When the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, the lights nate for approximately 27 seconds.
come on when any door is opened.  When one of the doors is opened, the dome light will
illuminate for approximately three minutes.
Push the button on the light once to turn the light on
 When the doors are closed, the dome light will auto-
manually, and push the button a second time to turn the
matically shut off after approximately 27 seconds.
light off.
The timing stops once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
Rear Dome Light Buttons (Sunroof Not Equipped) The dome light will turn off under any of the following
conditions:
1 — Dome Defeat Button
2 — Dome On Button  The dome light is disabled when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position.
 The dome lights will turn off automatically when the
To operate the rear dome light, proceed as follows: doors are locked.
 Push the switch to the on/right position from its center  The dome lights will automatically turn off after approx-
position and the lights are always on. imately 15 minutes of inactivity to preserve the battery.
 Push the switch to the off/left position from its center Timing Exiting The Vehicle
position and the lights are always off.
Rear Light Button (If Equipped With Sunroof) The dome light will illuminate under the following
 Leave the switch in the center position, and the lights conditions when the ignition is placed to the OFF position
On vehicles not equipped with a sunroof, a single dome are turned on and off when the doors are opened or and the key fob is removed:
light is located in the center of the roof. closed.
 The dome light will illuminate for 27 seconds after the
DOME LIGHT TIMING ignition is placed in the OFF position.
 The opening of one of the doors (approximately three
The dome light will automatically illuminate when the minutes).
doors are unlocked, the doors are opened or after the  After closing a door (approximately 27 seconds).
doors are closed.
The dome light timing is disabled when the doors are
locked.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION NOTE:

The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the two detent therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the positions for intermittent settings, the third detent for low shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating wiper operation and the fourth for high wiper operation. the windshield with washer fluid.
a switch, located on the end of the lever. Windshield Washer Operation For information on wiper care and replacement, see
Ú page 257.
2
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for
RAIN S ENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then This feature senses rain or snow fall on the windshield and
resume the intermittent interval previously selected. automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, multifunction lever to one of two detent positions to
the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn activate this feature.
off. The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
WARNING! sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could sensitive. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position
Windshield Wiper Lever lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or when not using the system.
1 — Push Forward For Rear Washer other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield NOTE:
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the If the end of the multifunction lever rotates from off to the
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
defroster before and during windshield washer use. first intermittent setting or from the first intermittent
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation setting to the second intermittent setting, the wipers will
4 — Pull For Front Washer perform a round up to clean the windshield.
Mist
5 — Push Up For Mist
Use this feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the MIST position and release for a single
CAUTION!
wiping cycle.
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
 Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — The Rain Sensing To use the washer, push the lever forward and
system will not operate if the NEUTRAL gear is selected hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed
at speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less unless the wiper while the wiper is in the off position, the wiper
switch is moved or the gear selector is moved out of will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
NEUTRAL. If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
 Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
operational when the vehicle is in the Remote Start intermittent interval previously selected.
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, Rain NOTE:
Sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned is held for more than 30 seconds. Once the lever is
Rain Sensor released, the pump will resume normal operation.
previously) exist.
NOTE:
 The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
REAR WINDOW W IPER/WASHER CAUTION!
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position. The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
 The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the the heating elements:
when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind- steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by  Use care when washing the inside of the rear
shield. rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever. window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
 Use of products containing wax or silicone may reduce NOTE: interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
Rain Sensing performance. If the front wipers are moving and the vehicle is shifted in mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
 The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on or off REVERSE, the rear wiper will perform one round up to elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 116. clean the rear window. with warm water.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the the first detent for intermittent operation and to window cleaners on the interior surface of the
following conditions: the second detent for continuous rear wiper window.
 Change In Ignition Position — If the vehicle is in Rain operation. If the front wipers are set to
 Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Sensing mode and the ignition is cycled from OFF to Automatic mode (on the wiper lever as well as enabled
ON, the auto wiper will be suppressed until vehicle through Uconnect Settings), placing the rear wiper in an
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the wiper intermittent position will cause the front and rear wipers to
switch is moved out of and back into the Intermittent sync up. Turning the front wipers off will cause the rear
wipe position. wiper to also stop.
WINDSHIELD WIPER D E-ICER — CLIMATE CONTROLS A/C Button

I F EQUIPPED The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
Press and release the A/C button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper faceplate to change the current setting.
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.
conditions: The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to 2
 Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
De-Icer will be activated automatically in the case of a system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and
DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
the ambient temperature is below 40°F (4.4°C). cabin.
 Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
De-Icer will be activated automatically when the rear expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in
defrost is turned on and the ambient temperature is front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
below 40°F (4.4°C). Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the
 Activation By Remote Start Operation — When Remote radiator and through the condenser. If the problem
Start is active and the outside ambient temperature is persists, please contact an authorized dealer.
less than 40°F (4.4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will
activate. Exiting Remote Start will resume its previous Recirculation Button
operation. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the Press and release this button on the
timer and operation will continue Ú page 116. touchscreen, or push the button on the
Auto-On Rear Window Defroster/Windshield Wiper faceplate, to change the system between
De-Icer — If Equipped Uconnect 4C NAV with 8.4-inch Display Automatic recirculation mode and outside air mode. The
Climate Controls Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
When placing the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
position, the Rear Window Defroster and Windshield MAX A/C Button can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
Wiper De-Icer will automatically turn on when the outside
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
ambient temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C).
touchscreen to change the current setting to can be used in all modes. In cold weather, recirculation
The Rear Window Defroster and Windshield Wiper De-Icer the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen grayed
automatically turn off after approximately 20 minutes. To illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the
manually shut the defroster/windshield off, push the Rear button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit. inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected
Defrost button. manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
NOTE:
Auto On can be enabled or disabled through the Uconnect Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
Settings Ú page 116. inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when SYNC Button
may automatically adjust to optimize customer experience the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
for warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc. automatically turns off after 20 minutes. Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to
toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC
AUTO Button CAUTION!
indicator is illuminated when SYNC is on. SYNC
Press and release this button on the is used to synchronize the passenger
touchscreen, or push the button on the Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
faceplate, to change the current setting. The the heating elements: Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
 Use care when washing the inside of the rear
This feature automatically controls the interior cabin window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the NOTE:
temperature by adjusting distribution and amount of interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
airflow. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be active during AUTO mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
operation to improve performance. Toggling this function Blower Control
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
will cause the system to switch between manual override with warm water. Blower Control is used to regulate the amount
mode and automatic modes Ú page 41. of air forced through the Climate Control
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive system. There are seven blower speeds
Front Defrost Button window cleaners on the interior surface of the available. Adjusting the blower will cause
Press and release the touchscreen button, or window. automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
push and release the button on the faceplate,  Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. speeds can be selected using either the blower control
to change the current airflow setting to Defrost knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates Faceplate
when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield Driver And Passenger Up And Down
and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control
Buttons knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for the best These buttons provide the driver and passenger with speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
windshield and side window defrosting and defogging independent temperature control. counterclockwise.
performance. When toggling the front defrost mode Push the red button on the faceplate or Touchscreen
button, the Climate Control system will return to the touchscreen or press and slide the temperature Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
previous setting. bar towards the red arrow button on the the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
Rear Defrost Button Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
Push the blue button on the faceplate or area between the icons.
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen or press and slide the temperature
touchscreen, or push and release the button on
bar towards the blue arrow button on the
the faceplate, to turn on the rear window
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
Mode Control Mix Mode NOTE:

Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and  It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
buttons on the touchscreen to change the side window demister outlets. This setting The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
airflow distribution mode. The airflow works best in cold or snowy conditions that mode, and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
distribution outlets are: instrument panel require extra heat to the windshield. This possible.
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets. setting is ideal for maintaining comfort while reducing  The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or metric
units by selecting the U.S./Metric customer program-
2
moisture on the windshield. A slight amount of air is also
Panel Mode directed through the panel outboard outlets. mable feature within Uconnect Settings.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually Climate Control OFF Button
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes Press and release this button to turn the low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can Climate Control ON/OFF. immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow changing the front blower knob setting.
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL Manual Operation Override
these outlets.
(ATC) This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be
Bi-Level Mode
Automatic Operation turned off when the system is being used in the manual
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets mode.
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
directed through the defrost and side window button on the touchscreen on the Automatic CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
demister outlets. Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
NOTE: 2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to maintain, by adjusting the driver, and passenger
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air temperatures. Once the desired temperature is Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep,
from the floor outlets. displayed, the system will achieve and automatically say one of the following commands:
maintain that comfort level.  “Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
Floor Mode
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is  “Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight not necessary to change the settings. You will Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
amount of air is directed through the defrost, experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
side window demister outlets, and panel the system to function automatically. Voice Command will not adjust the heated seats or
outboard outlets. steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING T IPS enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water  Activation By Remote Start Operation
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested of ice, slush, and snow. temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), the Windshield
control settings for various weather conditions. Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
Cabin Air Filter
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
Summer Operation The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
The engine cooling system must be protected with a from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your continue.
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT Operating Tips Chart
NOTE:
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. The following chart is for Manual Override Operation,
In the Red Special Series models, the cabin air filter was
otherwise run in AUTO.
Winter Operation treated with a biocide substance having antibacterial and
antiviral properties based on the active ingredient, citric
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
acid.
performance, make sure the engine cooling system is Set the mode control to
functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and Stop/Start System — If Equipped (Panel Mode), (A/C) on, and
concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may Hot Weather And blower on high. Roll down the
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Vehicle Interior Is windows for a minute to flush
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an Very Hot out the hot air. Adjust the con-
Vacation/Storage engine running condition. trols as needed to achieve com-
fort.
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of Turn (A/C) on and set the
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element located
time, see Ú page 291. Warm Weather mode control to (Panel
at the base of the windshield.
Mode).
Window Fogging It operates automatically once the following conditions are
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, met:
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Set the mode control to
 Activation By Front Defrost Cool & Humid Condi-
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. (Floor Mode) and turn (A/C)
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold tions
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long on to keep windows clear.
weather manual start with full defrost, and when the
periods, as fogging may occur. ambient temperature is below 40°F (4.4°C). Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield fog-
Outside Air Intake  Activation By Rear Defrost Cold Weather
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the ging starts to occur, move the
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the control to (Mix Mode).
Rear Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
is below 40°F (4.4°C).
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT Once the glove compartment is open, a light will turn on to
illuminate the compartment.
STORAGE NOTE:
 Do not insert objects in the glove compartment that will
Glove Compartment not allow the compartment to fully close.
The glove compartment is located on the passenger’s side  The glove compartment should be completely closed 2
of the instrument panel. while the vehicle is in motion.
To open the glove compartment proceed as follows: Console Storage Compartment
1. Unlock the compartment using the vehicle To open, push the storage handle and lift the cover.
emergency key.
The center console can be adjusted by moving it forward
Storage Compartment
2. Pull the handle to open the compartment. or rearward.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
Opening The Glove Compartment Front Armrest

1 — Glove Compartment Handle
Handle Grip NOTE:

Depending on vehicle configuration, the USB port may be
The handle grip is located on the passenger side of the
charge only, or media file capable.
instrument panel. The handle can be used to enter or exit
the vehicle or when traveling on rough terrain. POWER O UTLETS
The front power outlet is located under the center stack of
the instrument panel. It only operates with the ignition in
the ON/RUN position. The power outlet can power mobile
phones, electronics and other low power devices.
Front USB Port And AUX Jack

1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Port
Handle Grip If equipped, there is a second USB port located on the rear
of the center console.
USB/AUX C ONTROL
This feature allows an external device to be plugged into
the USB port or AUX jack. 12 Volt Power Outlet
Located below the heating ventilation and air conditioning
controls is the front USB port and AUX jack. WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
 Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
 Do not touch with wet hands.
Rear Center Console Charge-Only USB Port (Continued)
The Power Inverter will automatically turn on and off when

WARNING! a device is plugged in or removed.
 Close the lid when not in use and while driving the In order for the Power Inverter to work, the engine must be
vehicle. running and there must be no faults detected with the
alternator.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure. The Power Inverter is designed with built-in overload 2
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded, the
Power Inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
CAUTION! electrical device has been removed from the Power
Inverter it will automatically reset. To avoid overloading
 Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
W (15 Amp) to the socket. Do not damage the socket F94 Fuse 15A Blue Instrument Panel Power Outlet prior to using the Power Inverter.
by using unsuitable adapters. If the 180 W (15 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED
system will need to be replaced. WARNING!
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W Power Inverter outlet located
 Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power on the back of the center console to convert DC current to To avoid serious injury or death:
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., AC current. The Power Inverter can power cellular phones,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long electronics and other low power devices requiring up to  Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi- 150 W. Certain video game consoles will exceed this
 Do not touch with wet hands.
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the power limit, as will most power tools.
engine from starting.  Close the lid when not in use.
 Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,  If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the shock and failure.
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
 After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
115 Volt Power Inverter

WINDOWS WARNING!
To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly
and release it when you want the window to stop.
POWER W INDOW CONTROLS Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do

not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it
will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the
The window controls on the driver's door control all the the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
door windows. accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a window.
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/
NOTE:
RUN position. Occupants, particularly unattended
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
children, can become entrapped by the windows while
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If
operating the power window switches. Such
this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
window manually.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW F EATURES WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
Auto-Down Feature
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
The driver and front passenger door power window your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window window path before closing.
switch down for a short period of time, then release, and
Power Window Switches the window will go down automatically.
The passenger door windows can also be operated by To stop the window from going all the way down during the RESET AUTO-U P
using the single window controls on the passenger door Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
trim panel. The window controls will operate only when the Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
Lift the window switch up for a short period of time and 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
NOTE:
release; the window will go up automatically. completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
The power window switches will remain active for up to
three minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF To stop the window from going all the way up during the additional two seconds after the window is closed.
position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly. 2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the window
is fully open.
WINDOW L OCKOUT SWITCH DUAL PANE PANORAMIC POWER SUNROOF WARNING!

The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
WITH POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED  Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push The power sunroof switches are located between the sun fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
and release the window lockout switch (the indicator light visors on the overhead console. to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
on the switch will turn on). To enable the window controls, equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN 2
push and release the window lockout switch again (the position. Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
indicator light on the switch will turn off). dren, can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
 Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Power Sunroof Switches Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
1 — Power Sunshade Open/Close may result.
Power Window Lockout Switch 2 — Power Sunroof Open/Close
3 — Venting Sunroof
WIND B UFFETING OPENING A ND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of To retract the sunroof to the open position, push the
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the Open/Close switch and the sunroof will fully open. The
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the sunroof can be stopped in any position by pushing/pulling
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open the switch a second time while opening.
or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence To close the sunroof completely, pull the Open/Close
and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear switch and the sunroof will fully close. The sunroof can be
windows open, open the front and rear windows together stopped in any position by pushing/pulling the switch a
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the second time while it is closing.
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
VENTING SUNROOF PINCH PROTECT F EATURE SUNROOF M AINTENANCE

To vent the sunroof push the vent switch. This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
NOTE: the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the debris that may have collected in the tracks.
The vent switch has the automatic function only at the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction
opening of the sunroof. During the closing of the sunroof,
the switch must be held until closed.
if this occurs. HOOD
OPENING A ND CLOSING THE POWER WARNING!
TO OPEN THE H OOD
SUNSHADE  Do not let children play with the sunroof. Never leave
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an
Express Open/Close unlocked vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the
Push the shade switch for about one-half second and the the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle driver’s side of the instrument panel.
shade will automatically open. During the automatic open equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN
operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop the position. Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
shade. dren, can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
Pull the shade switch for about one-half second and the
shade will automatically close. During the automatic close
operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop the  In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
shade. from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
Manual Open/Close be severely injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are prop-
To open the shade part way, push the shade switch briefly erly secured.
and release.
 Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
To close the shade part way, pull the shade switch briefly
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any Hood Release Lever
and release.
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
NOTE: may result.
 The sunroof and the shade controls will operate only
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
 If the Remote Start functionality is active, it is not
possible to move the sunroof.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the NOTE:

safety latch release lever toward the passenger side
 Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
of the vehicle. The hood release lever is located
be in PARK.
behind the center front edge of the hood.
 While lifting the hood, use both hands.
 Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position. 2
TO CLOSE THE H OOD
WARNING!
Locking Tab Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Latch
1 — Safety Latch Location
CAUTION!
Remove the support rod from the locking tab and insert it To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
into the seat key hole located on the underside of the close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
hood. Be sure the rod is locked into position. and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood
is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
Support Rod And Seat
1 — Support Rod
2 — Support Rod Seat
LIFTGATE Emergency Opening

Proceed as follows:
4. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab slot to
trigger the release tab of the liftgate.
UNLOCK/O PEN THE LIFTGATE 1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or activate the 2. Fold the rear seats forward.
power door lock switches located on the driver door 3. Using the supplied screwdriver (located under cargo
handle. floor in tool kit), remove the yellow tab.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the electronic liftgate
release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Emergency Release Tab Slot Location

1 — Release Tab Slot
Emergency Opening Tab Location

1 — Yellow Tab
Liftgate Release Handle
The Liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
LOCK/CLOSE THE L IFTGATE CARGO AREA FEATURES

To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate closing Removable Rear Shelf — If Equipped
handle and pull in a downward motion to close the liftgate.
To remove rear shelf, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the two links that support the shelf at
the eyelets. 2
Adjusting The Rear Shelf
Closing Liftgate
1 — Liftgate Pull Handle
Rear Shelf Support Links
NOTE: 1 — Eyelets
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in possession
2 — Links
of the key fob because the liftgate may be locked.
To Lock The Liftgate
2. Lift the rear part of the overhead luggage shelf. Rear Shelf Pin
If vehicle is equipped with a Passive Entry lock button:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the 3. Clear the pins placed outside of the shelf, and then
liftgate, pushing the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry remove the rear shelf pulling it upwards.
lock button located to the right of the outside handle 4. The rear shelf can be stored in the cargo area, or
release will lock the vehicle. behind the front seatbacks.
NOTE:
The liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic
liftgate release.
Cargo Load Floor Displacement Load Floor

The vehicle is equipped with a load floor that can be To position the load floor from the lower to the upper
adjusted as needed. position, proceed as follows:
Position 1 (Lowered Position): 1. Grab the load floor handle and lift up the load floor.
This position allows you to make the load floor flat for ease 2. Correctly place the load floor on the side panel guides
of loading/unloading objects from the cargo area. This and on the rear cross member.
position also makes it possible to use the space below as Access To Tire Service Kit Or Spare Tire — If Equipped
another compartment for storing fragile or smaller
objects. To access the Tire Service Kit or spare tire and container
carrier, proceed as follows:
Position 2 (Elevated Position):
Load Floor 1. Grab the load floor handle and remove the floor.
When the rear seatbacks and front passenger seat are
folded flat, it creates space for objects of long dimensions. 2. Pull the tab and lift up on the carpet.
This position is recommended only when transporting Cargo Tie-Down Loops
objects, then move the load floor back to position 1.
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
Table Tilt Load should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
In addition to the two positions described previously, the moving.
load floor can also be placed in a tilted position, slanted
toward the rear seatbacks as to ease the access to the
underlying zone of the luggage compartment (e.g. to pick
up the spare tire or the Tire Service Kit).
Place the load floor in a way that it rests at the supports
1 and 2 on the sides of the cargo area.
The load floor provides securing of any cargo inside this
Table Tilt Load Supports
position, so that the cargo will not slide in the case of 1 — Loading Floor Support One
sudden braking. 2 — Loading Floor Support Two
Tie-Downs
Grocery Hooks — If Equipped Cargo Box — If Equipped NOTE:

Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer
The side panels may be equipped with three grocery hooks The cargo area contains a preformed cargo box that can
through Mopar® parts. External racks do not increase the
(one on the left side and two on the right side) for securing be used for the storage of objects that allows you to obtain
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the
loads that are not excessively heavy. a uniform level when loading.
total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus
the load on the Roof Luggage Rack, does not exceed the
maximum vehicle load capacity. 2
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Do not use the retractable roof when using the crossbars.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
Grocery Hook Cargo Box or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
NOTE: carrying cargo on your roof rack.
The cargo box is sized for a maximum capacity of
distributed weight equal to 242 lb (110 kg).
CAUTION!
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED  To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Roof Luggage Rack exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
for transporting accessories. distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the Roof Luggage Rack. Check the straps  Long loads, which extend over the windshield, should
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
attached.  Place a blanket or other protection between the
Grocery Hooks
surface of the roof and the load.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
 Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift. It is recom-
mended to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
panels or surfboards, which may result in damage to
the cargo or your vehicle.
 Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
3
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 57
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS CAUTION! I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY

Use this QR code to access your digital Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage L OCATION AND CONTROLS
experience. your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive
1. Tachometer over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air display that is located in the instrument cluster.
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
 Indicates the engine speed in
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”,
revolutions per minute (RPM x
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
1000).
dealer for service.
2. Instrument Cluster Display 3
 The instrument cluster display features a driver 5. Fuel Gauge
interactive display Ú page 57.
 The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel
3. Speedometer tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
 Indicates vehicle speed.  The fuel pump symbol points to the side
4. Temperature Gauge of the vehicle where the fuel door is
 The temperature gauge shows engine coolant located.
temperature. Any reading within the normal range Instrument Cluster Display And Controls Location
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper- INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY 1 — Instrument Cluster Display Locations
ating satisfactorily.
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster 2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
 The gauge will likely indicate a higher temperature display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
when driving in hot weather or up mountain the ignition in the OFF position, opening/closing of a door
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the will activate the display for viewing, and display the total
upper limits of the normal operating range. miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
WARNING! information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others Using a driver interactive display located on the
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your show you how systems are working and give you warnings
vehicle overheats. when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls
allow you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
Setting the system allows the driver to select information  Down Arrow Button 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering Push and release the down arrow button to scroll down- START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
wheel: ward through the main menu. OFF position.
 OK Button NOTE:
Push the OK button to access/select the information If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. See
Push and hold the OK button for one second to reset an authorized dealer to have the oil life reset.
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY MENU
OIL C HANGE R ESET
I TEMS
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience. NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display in the
Oil Change Due center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary
Your vehicle is equipped with an depending on your vehicle features.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons engine oil change indicator system.
The “Oil Change Due” message will Speedometer
1 — Left Arrow Button
display in the instrument cluster Push and release the up or down arrow button
2 — Up Arrow Button
display for five seconds after a single until the speedometer is displayed in the instrument
3 — Right Arrow Button chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil cluster display. Push and release the OK button to toggle
4 — Down Arrow Button change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is units (mph or km/h) of the speedometer.
5 — OK Button duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
Vehicle Info
driving style. Push and release the up or down arrow button
 Left Arrow Button until “Vehicle Info” is highlighted in the instrument cluster
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
Push the left arrow button to return to the main menu display. Push and release the right arrow button and
time the ignition is cycled to the ON or RUN position. To
from an info screen or submenu item. Coolant Temp will be displayed. Push the right or
reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the
 Up Arrow Button scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure: left arrow button to scroll through the following
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward information displays:
through the main menu. 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the  Tire Pressure — View the information relating to the Tire
 Right Arrow Button Pressure Monitoring System (If Equipped).
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Push and release the right arrow button to access the  Coolant Temperature — View the engine coolant
information screens or submenu screens of a main 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times temperature.
menu item. within 10 seconds.
 Trans Temperature — View the trans oil temperature.
 Oil Temperature — View the oil temperature.  Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel Screen Setup
 Battery Voltage — View the voltage value (state of economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip
B since the last reset. This menu item allows you to change the position of the
charge) of the battery.
information on the display.
 Service — View the service status message(s) (If  Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
Equipped). since Trip A or Trip B has been reset. Display Gears (Vehicles With Reconfigurable
Hold the OK button to reset feature information. Multi-Functional Display And Automatic Transmission)
Driver Assist — If Equipped
By selecting this item, you can select the display mode, the
Push and release the up or down arrow button Stop/Start – If Equipped particulars relating to the automatic transmission, and
until the Driver Assist menu title displayed is highlighted in Push and release the up or down arrow button choose between the following options:
the instrument cluster display. until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the
3
 “Single digit”
LaneSense — If Equipped instrument cluster display.
The right side of the display will show the letter
The instrument cluster display displays the current This menu shows messages related to Stop/Start. Only concerning the automatic transmission gear selector
LaneSense status and information. The information one message can be viewed at a time until the condition (P,R,N or D) position. After approximately two seconds,
displayed depends on LaneSense system status and the is cleared. When the Stop/Start is engaged (and the the letter will be displayed in a central position.
conditions that need to be met Ú page 116. engine is off), the associated hardware telltale is turned  “Full PRND”
on. Whenever a user pushes the Stop/Start button on the The letters PRND will display on the right side, the posi-
Fuel Economy central stack, a pop-up message of the Stop/Start status tion assumed by the gear selector will be highlighted in
This menu item allows you to view the fuel economy of the will appear on the instrument cluster display. the display. During the operation in sequential mode
vehicle. The following will display:
Audio (“AutoStick”), in place of the letter D, the gear will be
 Range (Miles or km) will be displayed.
Push and release the up or down arrow button
 Current Consumption (mpg or L/100km or km/l) until the Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument In The Upper Left/Top Right
 Average Consumption (mpg or L/100km or km/l) cluster display. NOTE:
Reset procedure shown at the bottom of the display. Depending on your vehicles trim level and status, some
Stored Messages options may not be available.
Trip Info Push and release the up or down arrow button
The information relating to the following can be displayed:
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the
until the Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument instrument cluster display. This feature shows the number External Compass — Time
cluster display. Toggle the left or right arrow button of stored warning messages. Pushing the left or temperature If Equipped (Hours/Minutes)
to select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display right arrow button will allow you to scroll through the Ignition Button — Date
the following: stored messages. If Equipped (Month/Day)
 Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
In the central area of the display, you can view all of the “Vehicle Shut Off (If Equipped)”  Speed Warning:
information previously mentioned as well as the following: By selecting the item “Vehicle Shut Off”, you can turn off Set the vehicle speed limit, which the driver is notified
the engine from the instrument cluster. This feature is through a visual and acoustic signaling (display of a
Compass — Date (Day/ External
available in the event of an ignition switch failure, and will message and a symbol on the display).
If Equipped Month/Year) temperature
display instructions for turning off the engine via the When the speed warning is set, the icon should remain
Speed Display — Distance Traveled instrument cluster display controls. visualized for the same duration time of the pop-up. If
Menu Item
If Equipped A (Trip A) the driver exceeded the set speed, the icon should
“Display”
Distance Traveled Ignition Button — remain for however long the vehicle is over the set
Time By selecting the “Display,” you can access the following speed.
B (Trip B) If Equipped
setting: Driver may also turn the Speed Warning “OFF” should
 Language: allows you to select the language in which to you choose not to use this feature.
Restore Default Settings display the information/warnings.  Seat Belt Reminder:
Selecting this item, and you can reset and restore the “Units Of Measure” This function is only viewable when the Seat Belt
default settings. Reminder (SBR) system is active.
By selecting the item “Units of Measure,” you can select
Settings the unit of measure to use for displaying various  Hill Start Assist:
magnitudes. Activation/Deactivation of the Hill Start Assist system.
This menu item allows you to change the settings for the
 Passenger Air Bag — If Equipped
following: Possible options are:
Front passenger air bag may be enabled or disabled.
 Display  US
“Lights”
 Units  Metric
 Clock and Date  Custom By selecting the item “Lights,” you can make the following
adjustments:
 Security “Clock & Date”
 Safety and Assistance  Headlight Off Delay: set the delay for headlight shutoff
By selecting the item, “Clock & Date” you can adjust the
 Lights after engine shutoff
clock.
 Doors and Locks  Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of headlight
Possible options are: brightness
NOTE:
 Set Time: adjust hours/minutes  Daytime Running Lights: activate/deactivate the
Some items may be displayed and managed through the
 Set Format: adjust the time format “12h” (12 hours) or daytime running lights
Uconnect system.
“24h” (24 hours)  Cornering lights: activate/deactivate the cornering
Vehicles Equipped With Multi-functional Display  Set Date: adjust day/month/year lights (If Equipped)
Reconfigurable:  Interior Ambient lights: adjust the level of interior
“Security”
The following menu/submenu items are available in the ambient lights
cluster display. By selecting the item “Security,” you can make the
 Greeting Lights: activate / deactivate greeting lights
following adjustments:
“Doors & Locks”

By selecting the item “Doors & Locks,” you can make the
Both trips can be reset (reset - start of a new trip). To
perform a reset, push and hold the OK button on the
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
following adjustments: steering wheel controls.
MESSAGES
 Auto Door Lock: activate/deactivate the automatic “Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display the figures
relating to: The warning/indicator light switches on in the instrument
locking of the doors with the vehicle moving panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
 Auto Unlock On Exit: automatic unlocking of the doors  Distance Traveled signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
when exiting the vehicle  Average Consumption and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
 Flash Light with Lock: activate the direction indicators  Travel Time (driving time) exhaustive and/or alternative to the information
when closing the doors Quantities Displayed contained in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to 3
 Sound Horn With Lock: activate/deactivate the horn read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information
Distance Traveled
when pushing the LOCK button on the key fob. The in this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
options are “Off,” “First Press,” and “Second Press”  Indicates the distance traveled by the start of the new
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The
 Horn With Remote Start: activate/deactivate the horn trip.
system check menu may appear different based upon
at the Remote Starting of the engine with the key fob Average Consumption equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
 Remote Door Unlock: allows you to open the driver door  Represents the average fuel consumption since the telltales are optional and may not appear.
only on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the key start of the new trip. The following warning lights and indicators will alert you to
fob
Travel Time a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some lights
“Compass” will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure
 Elapsed time since the start of the new trip.
By selecting the item “Compass” you can make the they work. If any lights remain on after starting your
OK Button vehicle, refer to the respective system warning light for
following adjustments:
Short Push Of The Button: display of various parameters. further information.
 Compass Calibration
Long Push Of The Button: reset quantities and begin a new
 Compass Variance
trip.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
TRIP COMPUTER New trip Air Bag Warning Light
Starts after reset: This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
The Trip computer is used to display information on car
 “Manual” by pushing the OK button. as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in
operation when the key is turned to the RUN position.
 “Automatic” when the “distance” reaches the value of the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position. If the
This function allows you to define two separate trips called light is either not on during startup, stays on, or
62140 (99999.9 km) or when the “time travel”
“Trip A” and “Trip B” where the car's “complete trips” are turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an
reaches the value of 999.59 (999 hours and
monitored in an independent manner. authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will
59 minutes).
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
 After each disconnection and reconnection of the
Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the
battery.
fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer system or a related component.
service the vehicle immediately. WARNING!
Door Open Warning Light
Brake Warning Light Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is This indicator will illuminate when a door is
This light monitors various brake functions, dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It ajar/open and not fully closed. The light will
including brake fluid level and parking brake will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a show which doors are currently ajar/open.
application. If the brake light turns on it may collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that NOTE:
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir. are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate Light
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake repair to the ABS system is required. This warning light will turn on when there's a
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by fault with the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the system Ú page 80.
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake WARNING!
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. inspected by an authorized dealer. safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity The light also will turn on when the parking brake is obtained as soon as possible.
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on NOTE: Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It Light
dropped below a specified level. does not show the degree of brake application.
This light informs you of a problem with the ETC
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Battery Charge Warning Light system. If a problem is detected while the
NOTE: This warning light will illuminate when the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on flash depending on the nature of the problem.
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
while the engine is running, there may be a Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
malfunction with the charging system. Contact completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light
fluid level checked.
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will Hood Open Warning Light Oil Temperature Warning Light
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible. This warning light will illuminate when the hood This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
is left open and not fully closed. engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
NOTE: on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
are pressed at the same time. NOTE: temperature to return to normal levels.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
immediate service is required and you may experience Liftgate Open Warning Light
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
This indicator will illuminate when the liftgate is
This warning light indicates when the driver or 3
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or left open and not fully closed. ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
NOTE: When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Oil Pressure Warning Light or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
Ú page 208.
This warning light will illuminate to warn of an engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while Vehicle Security Warning Light —
overheated engine condition. If the engine driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as If Equipped
coolant temperature is too high, this light will soon as possible, and contact an authorized
illuminate and a single chime will sound. dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on. This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
security system is arming, and then will flash
the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to Transmission Fault Warning Light —
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for Oil Pressure Sensor Failure Warning Light
If Equipped
service Ú page 244. This light will illuminate if there is a failure of
the oil pressure sensor. If this light illuminates, This light will illuminate (together with a
take it to an authorized dealer and have them message in the instrument cluster display and
inspect it. a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault.
Contact an authorized dealer if the message
remains after restarting the engine.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS Electric Park Brake Warning Light  When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid green
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Electric Park Brake is not functioning properly
to solid yellow.
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
Warning Light — If Equipped and service is required. Contact an authorized
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a dealer.
LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green
fault in the ACC system. Contact a local Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped to flashing yellow.
authorized dealer for service Ú page 83.
This warning light will illuminate after an Low Fuel Warning Light
accident has occurred, and the system has
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning shut the fuel off.
When the fuel level reaches approximately
1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) this light will turn on, and
Light remain on until fuel is added.
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light Icy Road Condition Warning Light —
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the If Equipped Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
This light will illuminate during an icy road Warning Light (MIL)
condition.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and
functioning and service is required as soon as possible. Keyless Enter n’ Go/Service Passive Entry automatic transmission control systems. This
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not
Warning Light warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/
also on. The telltale will illuminate in the event of RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
keyless system failure. come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
system inspected by an authorized dealer. possible. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the
Audio System Failure Warning Light — LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
If Equipped The LaneSense system provides the driver with When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
visual and steering torque warnings when the serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
This light will illuminate to report a failure of the
vehicle starts to drift out of its lane power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
Audio System. Contact an authorized
unintentionally without the use of a turn signal should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
dealership as soon as possible.
Ú page 101.
WARNING!
Service LaneSense Warning Light — Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
If Equipped pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This This warning light will illuminate when the the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flamma- LaneSense system is not operating and vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
ble substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, requires service. Please see an authorized on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the dealer. should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
driver, occupants or others. Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure
3
CAUTION! This warning light will illuminate when the telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light and service is required. Contact an authorized telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control sys- dealer for service. as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
tem. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Warning Light Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
The warning light switches on and a message is life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is ability.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
lower than the recommended value and/or Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD be guaranteed. not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
system is not functioning properly and that
Should one or more tires be in the condition previously low tire pressure telltale.
service is required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced mentioned, the display will show the indications Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
immediately. corresponding to each tire. malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) CAUTION! combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
Light — If Equipped Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent
fault in the Forward Collision Warning System. sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs,
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
Contact an authorized dealer for service repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
Ú page 202. contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of Transmission Temperature Warning Light YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
temperature is running hot. This may occur 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or light turns on, safely pull over and stop the the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into PARK and run driveshafts are mechanically locked together
function properly. the engine at idle or slightly higher until the light turns off. forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
CAUTION! WARNING! reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels
Ú page 78.
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you 4WD Lock Indicator Light
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
have been established for the tire size equipped on This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor the 4WD Lock mode. The front and rear
damage may result when using replacement equipment driveshafts are mechanically locked together,
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After- forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
market wheels can cause sensor damage. Using after- CAUTION! the same speed Ú page 78.
market tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inopera-
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Dusk Sensor Malfunction Indicator Light
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
ble. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom- This symbol lights up (together with a
transmission damage or transmission failure.
mended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dedicated message on display) when a dusk
dealer to have your sensor function checked. sensor malfunction is detected Ú page 33.
4WD Over Temperature Warning Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light — The icon will appear on the instrument panel
display to indicate overheating of the 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
If Equipped system. The mode selected by the user will be This warning light will indicate when the ESC
This light illuminates when there is a failure applied as soon as the system exits the system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the
with the tow hook. Contact an authorized overheating condition. instrument cluster will come on when the ignition
dealer for service. is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has Fuel Cutoff Failure Indicator Light — Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. This light will illuminate if there is a fuel cutoff front fog lights are on Ú page 32.
 The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an
authorized dealer and have them inspect it.
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed Hazard Warning Indicator Lights
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm The hazard warning indicators light up when
the vehicles Hazard Warning flasher switch has
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop Indicator Light 3
been pushed.
when ESC becomes inactive. This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle
 This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC security system has detected an attempt to
event.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
break into the vehicle.
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF parking lights or headlights are turned on
NOTE:
Indicator Light — If Equipped After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the Ú page 32.
This warning light indicates the ESC is off. Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate if a
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or problem with the system is detected. This condition will Sport Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. This light will turn on when Sport mode is
if it was turned off previously. active.
GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light —
If Equipped Automatic High Beam Indicator Light —
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a If Equipped
malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs. This indicator shows that the automatic high
beam headlights are on. This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control is
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
set to the desired speed Ú page 82.
Forward Collision Warning is off.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights Speed Warning Indicator Light — ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
When the left or right turn signal is activated, If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
the turn signal indicator will flash When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
independently and the corresponding exterior speed warning telltale will illuminate in the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be instrument cluster with a number matching the transmission control systems. When these systems are
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down set speed. When the set speed is exceeded, a operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
(left) or up (right). single chime will sound along with pop-up message of performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS “Speed Warning Exceeded.” Speed Warning can be turned
on and off in the instrument cluster display.
emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator The number “55” is only an example of a speed that can will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
Light — If Equipped be set. also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
This indicator shows when the HDC feature is BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
turned on. The light will be on solid when HDC
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
is armed. HDC can only be armed when the High Beam Indicator Light
transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and This indicator light will illuminate to indicate CAUTION!
the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these that the high beam headlights are on. With the
conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC low beams activated, push the multifunction  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off. lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
Idle Coasting Indicator Light — If Equipped turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
must be serviced before any emissions tests can be
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
The Idle Coasting feature saves fuel by allowing high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward performed.
engine speeds to drop to idle. When Idle you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass”
Coasting is active, the Idle Coasting Indicator  If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
scenario. severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
Light is shown in the Instrument Cluster
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Display. GRAY I NDICATOR L IGHTS
Light Sensor Failure Indicator Light Cruise Control Ready/Canceled Indicator
This light illuminates when there is light sensor
failure. If this light illuminates, have an
Light
authorized dealer inspect it. This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control function is ready (but not set), or
canceled, by the driver Ú page 82.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an the ignition or start the engine. This means that
connection port to allow access to information related to
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you
the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. should not proceed to the I/M station.
service technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and For states that require an Inspection and  The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
emissions system Ú page 116. Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning
minated until you place the ignition in the off posi- 3
tion or start the engine. This means that your
WARNING! and is not on when the engine is running, and vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can
that the OBD II system is ready for testing. proceed to the I/M station.
 ONLY an authorized service technician should
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
vehicle. recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
 If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you update. A recheck with the previously mentioned test
device, it may: can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.
 Be possible that vehicle systems, including vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
safety related systems, could be impaired or a 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
loss of vehicle control could occur that may not crank or start the engine. operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
result in an accident involving serious injury or going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
death.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
 Access, or allow others to access, information test over.
stored in your vehicle systems, including
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
personal information.
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
70
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE Proceed as follows:
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the gear
Starting” procedure below, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there.
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the selector in the PARK or NEUTRAL position. Crank the engine for no more than 10 seconds. This should
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat 2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing the the ignition in the RUN position, release the accelerator
belts. accelerator. pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
3. Press the START/STOP ignition button and release it
WARNING! as soon as the engine is started. WARNING!
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with 4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the  Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
access to an unlocked vehicle. OFF position and wait 10-15 seconds before throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
attempting to restart the engine. vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is personal injury.
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others TIP START F EATURE
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should  Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake Do not press the accelerator. Press briefly the START/ started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
pedal or the gear selector. STOP ignition button and release it. The starter motor will mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
continue to run but will automatically disengage when the could enter the catalytic converter and once the
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in engine is running. engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
a location accessible to children), and do not leave and vehicle.
the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A child could I F E NGINE F AILS T O S TART
operate power windows, other controls, or move the  If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
vehicle. WARNING! may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or
the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the dangerous if done improperly Ú page 242.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious
driving range. personal injury. CAUTION!
Normal Starting
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
NOTE: If the engine fails to start after you have followed the crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Normal starting of either a cold or warm engine is obtained “Normal Starting” procedure, and has not experienced an Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. extended park condition as identified in “Extended Park
STARTING AND OPERATING 71
COLD WEATHER OPERATION CAUTION!

Opening the driver side door with the ignition in RUN will
sound a short chime that reminds the driver to place the
To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold conditions To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank ignition to OFF.
an externally powered electric block heater (if equipped) is continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait When the ignition is in the OFF position, the window
required for the 1.3L Turbo engine below -20°F (-29°C). 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. switches remain active for three minutes. Opening a front
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low door will cancel this function.
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than -20°F (-29°C) AFTER S TARTING — WARMING UP THE After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the
temperature inside the engine compartment to cool
for the 1.3L Turbo engine, and the oil temperature sensor ENGINE before shutting off the engine.
reading indicates an engine block heater has not been
used. The message “plug in engine heater” will be Proceed as follows: TURBOCHARGER “COOL DOWN” —
displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient  Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a reduced RPM, I F E QUIPPED 4
temperature is below -4°F (-20°C) at the time the engine without accelerating suddenly.
is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool the
 It is recommended to wait until the engine coolant
the next cold start. turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending on
temperature gauge starts to rise for maximum perfor-
EXTENDED P ARK S TARTING mance. the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump will
run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut
NOTE: STOPPING THE ENGINE off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger. Although
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is
Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key normal to hear it running during this time.
been started or driven for at least 30 days. (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™)
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
To shut off the engine with a vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
crank cycle. push the START/STOP button three times consecutively A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
2. Press the START/STOP ignition button and release it within a few seconds. The engine will shut down, and the drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
when the engine starts. ignition will be placed in the RUN position. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place Turning off the car (cycle the ignition from the RUN After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds position to the OFF position), the power supply to the 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended accessories are maintained for a period of three minutes. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
Park Starting procedure.
NOTE: limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow If the vehicle fails to shut off using the ignition Ú page 57.
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
72 STARTING AND OPERATING
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be The EPB switch is located in the center console. NOTE:
detrimental and should be avoided. You can engage the EPB in two ways: The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch is
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a held for longer than 60 seconds in either the released or
 Manually, by applying the parking brake switch. applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
 Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature the switch.
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
in the customer programmable features section of the
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the EPB will
Uconnect settings or in “Safe Hold” conditions.
recommended viscosity and quality grades Ú page 297. automatically engage whenever the transmission is
moved into PARK while the ignition switch is in the OFF
CAUTION! position. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement while the EPB is
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in engaging.
the engine or damage may result.
The EPB will be automatically released if the driver's seat
belt is buckled (only in case of automatic transmission)
NOTE: and driver's intention to start (in forward or reverse
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few direction) is recognized by the system.
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
To release the EPB manually, the ignition must be in the
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
RUN position. Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push
preted as a problem.
the EPB switch down momentarily. You may hear a sound
Electric Park Brake Switch from the back of the car while the parking brake
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) To apply the EPB manually, pull up on the switch
disengages. You may also notice a small amount of
movement in the brake pedal. Once the EPB is fully
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers simple momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of the disengaged, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument
operation, and some additional features that make the vehicle while the EPB engages. Once the parking brake is cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
parking brake more convenient and useful. fully engaged, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the cluster and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If NOTE:
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the your foot is on the brake pedal while you apply the EPB, When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied. Also, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement. wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. The EPB can be applied even when the ignition is in the the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the EPB before placing
OFF position however, it can only be released when the the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the trans-
ignition is in the RUN position. mission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK. The EPB should always be
applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection
WARNING! engage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion, maintain through the Customer Programmable Features section of
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob upward pressure on the EPB switch for as long as the Uconnect Settings.
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. engagement is desired. The Brake Warning Light could Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed by
illuminate in case the hydraulic system is not available. pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically transmission is placed in PARK and the ignition is in the
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to while the vehicle remains in motion. RUN position. In some cases, if the ignition is cycled from
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
To disengage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion, ON/RUN to OFF and the gear selector is not firmly locked
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete in the PARK position, EPB applies automatically even if
stop using the EPB, when the vehicle reaches Auto Park Brake has been previously disabled.
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
approximately 1.9 mph (3 km/h) the EPB will remain
transmission gear selector.
engaged. SAFEHOLD 4
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
a location accessible to children), and do not leave WARNING! engage the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is
the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A child could
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or left unsecured while the ignition is in the RUN position.
vehicle. repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle The EPB will automatically engage if all of the following
may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be conditions are met:
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a  Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
a collision. collision.  There is no attempt to press the brake pedal or accel-
erator pedal.
 Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
 The seat belt is unbuckled.
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB system, a  The driver door is open.
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate. This may be
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll  The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
accompanied by the Brake Warning Light flashing. In this
and cause damage or injury. status, some EPB functionalities may be deactivated. In SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the EPB
this event, urgent service of the EPB system is required. Switch while the driver door is open and the brake pedal is
Do not rely on the EPB to hold the vehicle stationary. pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be
CAUTION! enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h)
AUTO PARK BRAKE or the ignition is placed to the OFF position and back to RUN
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the again.
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h)
authorized dealer immediately. and the automatic transmission is placed in PARK
whenever the ignition is in the OFF position. Auto Park
BRAKE SERVICE M ODE When brake service work is complete, the following steps The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an normal operation: and road conditions. The transmission electronics are
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which  Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
 Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
service.  Apply the EPB Switch. hundred miles (kilometers).
NOTE:
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster WARNING!
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear
if Brake Service Mode cannot be deactivated.
caliper bore. With the EPB system, this can only be done  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
after retracting the EPB actuator. The actuator retraction engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
can be done easily by entering the Brake Service Mode.
WARNING!
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
This menu based system will guide you through the steps You can be badly injured working on or around a motor accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to perform vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
rear brake service. the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
to be activated: your vehicle to a competent mechanic. pedal.
 The vehicle must be at a standstill.  Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
 The parking brake must be disabled.
 The transmission must be in park or neutral.
9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
 The EPB switch not activated. NOTE: running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
 The vehicle in ignition RUN position. You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
of PARK. the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
 The brake pedal not pressed.
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
While in service mode, the EPB Warning Light will flash The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed beside
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
continuously while the ignition is in the RUN position. the gear selector and in the instrument cluster display. To
against unwanted movement.
select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
NOTE: selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You  When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
if Brake Service Mode cannot be activated. out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low (Continued)
speeds Ú page 78. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
position) will manually select the transmission gear, and Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
WARNING! will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with 1, 2, 3, etc. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to NOTE: between these gears.
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, DO NOT press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear CAUTION!
transmission gear selector. (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
a location accessible to children), and do not leave for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
especially important when the engine is cold.
the ignition in the ON or RUN position. A child could 4
vehicle. GEAR RANGES
PARK (P)
CAUTION! This range supplements the Electric Park Brake (EPB) by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this
 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
vehicle has come to a complete stop. motion.
 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before shifting the
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the
 Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
Gear Selector Lock Button move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
This transmission has been developed to meet the needs precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
of the manufacturer’s current and future lineup of FWD/ downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
GEAR SELECTOR AWD vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to When exiting the vehicle, always:
optimize the customer’s driving experience and fuel
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, economy. By design, some vehicle and drive-line  Apply the parking brake.
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions. combinations utilize NINTH gear only in very specific  Shift the transmission into PARK.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift driving situations and conditions.  Turn the ignition OFF.
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward  Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
(+) while in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE
WARNING! WARNING! CAUTION!

 Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the  Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure  Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle should never exit a vehicle while the engine is tion, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
movement and possible injury or damage. running or the propulsion system is active. Before damage to the gear selector could result.
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
 Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if  DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans- NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the igni-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake damage the drivetrain.
tion is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
movement. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete position:
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.  When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
gear selector, and firmly move the gear selector all the
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop- access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
 Look at the transmission gear position display and
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle. be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the blinking.
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is  With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could selector will not move out of PARK.
transmission gear selector.
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could REVERSE (R)
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling a location accessible to children), and do not leave This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
normally (or stopped) and your foot is firmly pressing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child could REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
the brake pedal. operate power windows, other controls, or move the stop.
(Continued) vehicle. NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the Electric Park Brake and
shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. NOTE:

WARNING! This is done to prevent transmission damage due to In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift up or
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to overheating. down when the driver moves the gear selector rearward (+)
coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the or forward (-), except as follows:
your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate  The transmission will automatically upshift when
might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. and the transmission may operate differently until the necessary to prevent engine overspeed.
transmission cools down.  The transmission will automatically downshift as the
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
CAUTION! modified depending on engine and transmission display the current gear.
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature  The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST or
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to SECOND gear (depending on model) when coming to a
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) 4
converter clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear, the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 112. are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm. Normal  You can start out (from a stop) in FIRST or SECOND
operation will resume once the transmission temperature gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be helpful in
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 246.
has risen to a suitable level. snow or icy conditions. Tap the gear selector forward or
AutoStick rearward to select the desired gear after the vehicle is
DRIVE (D) brought to a stop.
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
This range should be used for most city and highway  If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
providing manual shift control, giving you more control of
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, overspeed, that shift will not occur.
the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
and the best fuel economy. The transmission braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,  The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can a vehicle speed.
also provide you with more control during passing, city  Avoid using Cruise Control when AutoStick is engaged
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer because the transmission will not shift automatically.
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds towing and many other situations.  Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift AutoStick is enabled.
Operation
control to select a lower gear. Under these conditions,  The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside fault or overheat condition is detected.
using a lower gear will improve performance and extend
the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the
buildup. the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
transmission gear being used. Moving the gear selector
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating position at any time without taking your foot off the
forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an
limits, the transmission controller may modify the accelerator pedal.
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or cluster.
WARNING!
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible Active Drive (4WD) And Active Drive Low (4WD LOW)
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power Transfer Unit
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If the
(PTU). This system is automatic with no driver inputs or
personal injury. transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
required.
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
TRANSMISSION LIMP H OME M ODE I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
Transmission function is electronically monitored for
(K EYLESS VEHICLE) wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could rear wheels.
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock,
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may ignition can be turned to the OFF position. Also, the (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in neutral. The transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp the OFF position. and performance characteristics.
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the BRAKE TRANSMISSION S HIFT CAUTION!
transmission.
I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
following steps: transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are
applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
must be in the RUN position (engine running or not) and FOUR-W HEEL DRIVE (4WD)
the brake pedal must be pressed.
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. The four-wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in normal
The brake pedal must also be pressed before pushing the
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine button on the gear selector to shift from NEUTRAL into driving mode.
turns off. DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving NOTE:
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. at low speeds. It is not possible to carry out the change of mode when the
vehicle exceeds the speed of 75 mph (120 km/h).
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
Enabling Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk Models Only) Disabling 4WD LOW
The buttons for the activation of four-wheel drive are To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle must be
located on the Selec-Terrain switch and allow you to select stationary and the transmission shifted into NEUTRAL.
the following: Push the 4WD LOW button once.
 4WD LOCK
 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only) SELEC-TERRAIN
Active Drive Control — If Equipped Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
MODE SELECTION G UIDE 4

Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode.
4WD LOW Button (Trailhawk)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the off-road
performance in all modes. To enable 4WD LOW, please
see the following steps:
Enabling 4WD LOW
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in RUN position or
4WD LOCK Button with the engine running, shift the transmission into
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to ensure NEUTRAL and push the 4WD LOW button once. The
immediate availability of torque to the rear drive axles. instrument cluster will display the message "4WD LOW"
This feature is selectable in AUTO mode and automatic in once the shift is complete.
the other driving mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the NOTE:
following ways: Selec-Terrain Switch
 Both LOCK and LOW LED lights will blink and then
 When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed. become active on the Selec-Terrain switch until the
 When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated from AUTO to shift is complete.
any other off-road modes.  The instrument cluster display will illuminate the "4WD
LOW" icon.
more wheel spin and higher shift points to help motor

through loose areas.
POWER STEERING
 MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor The electric power steering system will provide increased
traction, such as roads covered by mud or wet grass. vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The power
 ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only available in steering system adapts to different driving conditions.
4WD LOW. The device sets the vehicle to maximize
traction and allow the highest steering capacity for WARNING!
off-road surfaces. This mode gives you the maximum
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
performance off-road. Use for low speed obstacles
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)  ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles equipped If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” OR “POWER
 AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a continuous with the Trailhawk package. STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM” message and
operation, is fully automatic and can be used on and  Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed a steering wheel icon are displayed on the instrument
off-road. This mode balances traction to ensure Control for steep downhill control Ú page 194. cluster screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be
maneuverability and acceleration improvement taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has
compared to a vehicle with two-wheel drive. This mode
also reduces fuel consumption, since it allows the
ACTIVE GRILLE SHUTTERS — IF EQUIPPED lost power steering assistance Ú page 57.
disconnect of the drive shaft where conditions permit. Your vehicle may be equipped with Active Grille Shutters. NOTE:
 SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater stability Active Grille Shutters is an automatic system with mobile  Even if the power steering assistance is no longer oper-
under conditions of bad weather. It's used on and flaps applied in front of the cooling module that aims to ational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
off-road and on surfaces with poor traction, such as improve vehicle aerodynamic efficiency with its automatic these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
roads covered with snow. When in SNOW mode opening/closing movement. The opening/closing steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
(depending on certain operating conditions), the trans- movement of the Active Grill Shutters reduces parking maneuvers.
mission will use SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear) consumption while ensuring optimal engine operating  If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
during launches, to minimize wheel slippage, except temperature conditions. service.
for in 4WD LOW (Trailhawk models only). When a greater air flow is required for cooling (e.g. when
 SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor driving in urban traffic) the flaps open, whereas when
traction, such as sandy bottoms. The transmission is temperature is low or air flow is enough (example when
set to provide maximum traction. This mode allows driving on highways), the flaps close.
STOP/START SYSTEM POSSIBLE R EASONS T HE E NGINE D OES It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
The Stop/Start function was designed to reduce fuel N OT AUTOSTOP START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
consumption. The system will stop the engine items listed above.
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. TO START T HE E NGINE WHILE IN
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
the accelerator pedal will automatically restart the engine.
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display AUTOSTOP MODE
AUTOSTOP MODE Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations the engine
will not stop:
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal  Driver’s seat belt is not buckled. The transmission will automatically re-engage upon
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into  Driver’s door is not closed. engine restart.
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met,
 Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
4
can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
mode.  Battery charge is low. Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
 The vehicle is on a steep grade.  The transmission gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
 Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept- except in the PARK and NEUTRAL position.
 The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A able cabin temperature has not been achieved.  To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the  HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start  HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
 HVAC is set to MAX A/C.  HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
section Ú page 57.
 Engine has not reached normal operating temperature. adjusted.
 The vehicle must be completely stopped.
 The transmission is not in a forward gear.  Battery voltage drops too low.
 The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
 Hood is open.  Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
brake pedal pressed.
 Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode (if equipped  A Stop/Start system error occurs.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the with 4WD).
zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate  4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode (if equipped
 Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure with with 4WD).
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
vehicle in DRIVE position.  A system fault is present.
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
 Accelerator pedal input.  Steering angle is beyond threshold.
 Engine temp is too high.
 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from previous
AUTOSTOP.
 Steering angle is beyond threshold.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric Park NOTE:  Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time.
Brake While In Autostop Mode: The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled,
 The driver’s door is open and brake pedal released. condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on. Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice
versa.
 The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat belt is TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE S TOP/
unbuckled.
S TART S YSTEM CRUISE C ONTROL
 The engine hood has been opened.
 A Stop/Start system error occurs. When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off, the bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
engine may require a manual restart and the Electric Park The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of
Brake may require a manual release (press brake pedal SYSTEM M ALFUNCTION the steering wheel.
and push Electric Park Brake switch) Ú page 57.
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF T HE S TOP/ system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
S TART S YSTEM will appear in the instrument cluster display Ú page 57.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system: Cruise Control Buttons
 Cruise Control for cruising at a constant preset speed.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining a set
2 — CANC/Cancel
distance between you and the vehicle ahead using
Fixed Speed Cruise Control to automatically adjust the 3 — SET (-)/Decel
Stop/Start OFF Switch preset speed. 4 — On/Off
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the center NOTE: 5 — RES/Resume
console). The light on the switch will illuminate. The
 In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
“STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the instrument
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles NOTE:
cluster display and the Autostop mode will be disabled
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature The Cruise Control function will not work in 4WD Low.
Ú page 57.
selected.
WARNING!
To Vary The Speed Setting WARNING!
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system can- Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system can-
not maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by not maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go
too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by pushing too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in the SET (-) button. and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-cov- U.S. Speed (mph) heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-cov-
ered or slippery. ered or slippery.
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
Activation the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph. Resume Speed
 If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control. The continue to adjust until the button is released, then the To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button 4
Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster display will new set speed will be established. and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button 20 mph (32 km/h).
Metric Speed (km/h)
a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in Deactivation
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or
WARNING! the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h. normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
 If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will deactivate the Cruise Control without erasing the set
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is speed from memory.
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
new set speed will be established. Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF To Accelerate For Passing position erases the set speed from memory.
when you are not using it. While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to ADAPTIVE CRUISE C ONTROL (ACC) —
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the set speed. I F E QUIPPED
Setting A Desired Speed
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
the desired speed, push and release the SET (+) or SET (-)
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
button. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
vehicle set speed. system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise
operate at the selected speed. The Cruise Indicator Light,
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down Control function performs differently if your vehicle is not
along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. equipped with ACC Ú page 82.
instrument cluster when the speed is set.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light

WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a The Cruise Control buttons (located on the right side of the
 The ACC system: steering wheel) operate the ACC system.
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle
directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.  Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
NOTE: vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
 If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
 Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the
tions into account, and may be limited upon
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
adverse sight distance conditions.
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.  Does not always fully recognize complex driving
 Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive distance warnings.
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
You should turn the ACC system off:
 Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware  When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
of the feature selected Ú page 303. heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones). 1 — SET (+)/Accel
WARNING! 2 — CANC/Cancel
 When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp; when
3 — SET (-)/Decel
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve- slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes. 4 — Distance Setting Decrease
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be 5 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
 When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, 6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,  When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a 7 — RES/Resume
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe constant speed. 8 — Distance Setting Increase
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion and death or serious personal injury.
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) WARNING!
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
system settings. The information it displays depends on (32 km/h). Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
ACC system status. when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button until instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.” You could lose control and have a collision. Always
one of the following appears in the instrument cluster When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will ensure that the system is off when you are not using it.
display: read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off NOTE: To Set A Desired Speed
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
Cruise Control Off.” When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
 When in 4WD Low.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready  When you apply the brakes.
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The 4
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has  When the parking brake is applied.
NOTE:
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise  When the gear selector is in PARK, REVERSE or
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
Control Ready.” NEUTRAL.
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
Adaptive Cruise Control Set  When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range. the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the  When the brakes are overheated. Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
display will read “ACC SET.”  When driver switches Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to)
to Full Off mode. Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display. To Activate/Deactivate
WARNING!
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
following ACC activity occurs: button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster display In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not
will read “ACC Ready.” react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warn-
 System Cancel ing does not activate and no alarm will sound even if
 Driver Override To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the
 System Off Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
 ACC Proximity Warning distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe dis-
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
 ACC Unavailable Warning tance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
ACC or Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set when the vehicle To Turn Off To Vary The Speed Setting
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle. Neither system cannot be The system will turn off and clear the set speed in To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
set below 20 mph (32 km/h). memory if: After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
 The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
NOTE:
pushed the SET (-) button.
 Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause  The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed U.S. Speed (mph)
the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set  The ignition is placed in the OFF position
speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER OVERRIDE”  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in
 4WD Low is engaged a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
will display in the instrument cluster display.
 If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed To Resume the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be controlling If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)  If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle button and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by The instrument cluster display will show the last set is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
the position of the accelerator pedal. speed. ment cluster display.
To Cancel Metric Speed (km/h)
ACC or Fixed Speed Cruise Control can only be resumed at
The following conditions cancel the system: speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
 The brake pedal is applied. NOTE:
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
 The CANC button is pushed. ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in
 If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
 An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs. continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
 The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position. button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
WARNING!
 The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over- the instrument cluster display.
heated). The Resume function should only be used if traffic and NOTE:
 The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-)
System (ESC/TCS) activates. too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road condi- button, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
 The vehicle parking brake is applied. tions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or deceler- vehicle.
 The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode. ate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
When ACC Is Active: The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
 When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the  The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi- set speed.
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will  The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
automatically slow the vehicle. sensor.
 The ACC system maintains set speed when driving  The distance setting is changed.
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on  The system disengages Ú page 85.
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
necessary.
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds Distance Settings NOTE: 4
normal range (overheated). The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars) applies the brakes.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC 2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by 3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars) its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), 4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar) set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
Increase button and release. Each time the button is force.
distance setting will show in the instrument cluster
display. pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). NOTE:
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is warning for the driver to take action and does not neces-
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar sarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
(shorter). applying the brakes autonomously.
If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, Overtake Aid

the instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set With When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) engaged
Target Detected Light. The system will then adjust vehicle and following a vehicle, the system will provide an
speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist
regardless of the set speed. in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and
will only be active when passing on the left hand side.
Display Warnings And Maintenance To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important “CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
to note the following maintenance items:
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
“FRONT RADAR SENSOR TEMPORARILY  Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the Windshield” warning will display to indicate when
BLOCKED” WARNING sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to conditions temporarily limit system performance. This
damage the sensor lens. most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
 Do not use solvents or abrasive pastes. The radar is snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
warning will display and a chime will sound when
equipped with a defrost system, so in some climatic become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
conditions it could reach high temperatures. Wait at mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as least 30 seconds after the engine has been placed in glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become the OFF mode before touching the sensor. read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt  Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so Windshield” and the system will have degraded
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and performance.
read “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” and require a sensor realignment. The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
the system will deactivate.  If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service. driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in  Do not attach or install any accessories near the system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or sensor, including transparent material. Doing so could Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the cause an ACC system failure or malfunction. any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when When the condition that deactivated the system is no temporarily occur.
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
this warning may temporarily occur. Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function when examine the windshield and the camera located on the
NOTE: reactivated. back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require
If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” NOTE: cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
 If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” When the condition that created limited functionality is no
available.
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
NOTE:
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front Wind-
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the authorized dealer.
fascia/bumper. shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
 Installing a snow plow or front-end protector is not on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
inhibit ACC/FCW operation. camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING OFFSET DRIVING TURNS AND BENDS

If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
reads “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Frontal Camera offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability,
Service Required”, “Cruise Control Service Required”, or in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of
“Cruise Control Temporarily Unavailable", there may be an to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and the curve, the system will resume your original set speed.
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still brake or accelerate unexpectedly. NOTE:
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later,
following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an USING ACC ON HILLS
authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills. 4
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or steepness of the hill.
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need
to intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Offset Driving Condition Example
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
ACC Hill Example

LANE CHANGING NARROW VEHICLES STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's distance to the vehicle ahead. stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not stationary object as it did not previously detect movement
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing if necessary.
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
Lane Changing Example

PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST PARKSENSE SENSORS PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED On vehicles equipped with both Front and Rear
ParkSense, there are six sensors located in the rear
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer -
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and fascia/bumper. Vehicles only equipped with Rear Programmable Features section of the Uconnect system
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/ ParkSense have four sensors located in the rear fascia/ Ú page 116.
or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up bumper.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
or moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). The sensors monitor the area behind the vehicle that is instrument cluster display Ú page 57. It provides visual
For limitations of this system and recommendations, see within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/
Ú page 94. obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected
59 inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the obstacle.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
PARKSENSE DISPLAY 4
orientation of the obstacle.
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense is active when the gear selector is shifted to NOTE: The warning display will turn on indicating the system
REVERSE or to a forward gear and an obstacle is detected, For information on ParkSense Active Park Assist, see status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
as long as the system is on. When the gear selector is Ú page 97. is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
shifted to NEUTRAL (or PARK in case of automatic The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/ The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
gearbox), the system becomes inactive. When the vehicle bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
is moving forward, the system will remain active until the within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect based on the object’s distance and location relative to the
vehicle speed remains below approximately 11 mph obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to vehicle.
(18 km/h). Reducing the speed approximately below 39 inches (100 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
9 mph (15 km/h), the system will come back active. When horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
the vehicle is moving in REVERSE, the system will remain orientation of the obstacle.
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
active as long as the speed remains below the maximum
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
operating speed of 7 mph (11 km/h). When the maximum
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle, and the audible
speed limit is exceeded, the system is disabled and the
chime will increase as the object gets closer to the vehicle.
ParkSense switch LED with illuminate. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed reduces below
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs

1 — Solid Center Arc 7 — Flashing Center Arc
2 — Flashing Center Arc 8 — Solid Center Arc
3 — Flashing Left/Center/Right Arcs 9 — Solid Center Arc
4 — Flashing Left/Center/Right Arcs 10 — Solid Center Arc
5 — Flashing Left/Center/Right Arcs 11 — Flashing Arcs
6 — Flashing Left/Center/Right Arcs 12 — Flashing Arcs
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Rear Distance Greater than 59–52 inches 52-41 inches 41-34 inches 34-24 inches 24-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) 59 inches (150 cm) (150-130 cm) (130-105 cm) (105-85 cm) (85-60 cm) (60-30 cm) (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None Audible chime increases as the object gets closer to the vehicle Continuous
4
Radio Volume
No Yes
Reduced
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

Front Distance Greater than 39 inches 39-32 inches 32-24 inches 24-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) (100 cm) (100-80 cm) (80-60 cm) (60-30 cm) (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None Audible chime increases as the object gets close to the vehicle Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audible tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an LED will be on. PRECAUTIONS
obstacle has been detected, and the vehicle is stationary.
If the obstacle has been detected within less than
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST NOTE:
12 inches (30 cm), then the Parksense will not turn off the SYSTEM  Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
Front Park Assist audible alert.
When the ParkSense System has detected a faulted Sense system operating properly.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate a  Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected single chime, and it will show the "PARKSENSE tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE  When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
Uconnect system Ú page 116. UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
If the Uconnect system is equipped, chime volume
message for five seconds. Under this condition, on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
settings will not be accessible from the instrument cluster
ParkSense will not operate.  ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
display.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or radio when it is sounding a tone.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
The factory default volume setting is medium.
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/ covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
through ignition cycles. bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of Failure to do so can result in the system not working
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
ENABLING A ND DISABLING P ARKSENSE ignition. If the message continues to appear see an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with authorized dealer. could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
panel below the Uconnect display. message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an  Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
authorized dealer. system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, etc. are
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
system, the instrument cluster display Ú page 57 will CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misin-
show the “ParkSense Disabled” message for terpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
approximately five seconds.
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not message to be displayed in the instrument cluster
The ParkSense switch LED turns on when the system is scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage display.
disabled by pushing the switch, as well as in case of failure the sensors.
or temporary disabling conditions. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the
NOTE:
CAUTION! WARNING ALERTS
If any objects are attached to the fascias/bumpers within
a 6.5 ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and cause  ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to Less than
Distance 12–65 inches
false alerts and possibly blockage. recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. 12 inches
(inches/cm) (30–60 cm)
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not (30 cm)
 There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the Arcs-Left 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
 The operation of the rear sensors is automatically sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity. Arcs-Right 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is inserted
in the vehicle's tow hook socket, while the front Audible chime
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
sensors stay active and can provide acoustic and visual increases as the
Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an
warnings. The rear sensors are automatically reacti- Audible Alert objects within
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the Continuous
vated when the trailer's cable plug is removed. driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Park-
Chime the vehicle’s
path get close to
4
Sense.
WARNING! the vehicle
 Drivers must be careful when backing up even when Radio Volume

Yes Yes
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your SIDE D ISTANCE WARNING (SDW) Reduced
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for SYSTEM
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, NOTE:
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon- The Side Distance Warning system has the function of
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to detecting the presence of side obstacles near the vehicle  Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if on
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in using the parking sensors located in the front and rear when the system is sounding an audible tone.
serious injury or death. fascias/bumpers.  The alert chime is activated only when the obstacle is
in the vehicle path.
 Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended Side Distance Warning Display
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be Activation — Deactivation
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be displayed if
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is The system can operate only after driving a short distance
“Sound and Display” is selected from the
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and 11 mph (0 and
Customer-Programmable Features section of the
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because 18 km/h). The system can be activated/deactivated via
Uconnect system Ú page 116.
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect system. If the
the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the contin- The system warns the driver with an acoustic signal and ParkSense System is deactivated via the ParkSense Hard
uous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball where provided, with visual indications on the instrument switch then the Side Distance Warning system will
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size panel display. automatically be deactivated.
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
Message on the display for Side Distance Warning remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle
feature: the ignition key. WARNING!
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in the case of  ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the  Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
a failure of the Side Distance Warning system sensors. radio when it is sounding a tone. that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
Free the fascias/bumpers of any obstacles, ensure that  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
the front and rear fascias/bumpers are free of snow, ice, to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
operating properly. Failure to do so can result in the system not working the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the contin-
“SDW Not Available” — This message is displayed if the
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it uous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
Side Distance Warning system is not available. The failed
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
operation of the system might be due to the insufficient
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
voltage from the battery or other failures on the electrical
 The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may inter- is behind the vehicle.
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the electrical system checked. fere with the correct operation of the parking sensors.
Before using the ParkSense system, it is recom-
Operation With A Trailer mended to remove the removable tow hook ball CAUTION!
The system is automatically deactivated when the trailer's assembly and any attachments from the vehicle when
it is not used for towing operations. If you wish to leave  ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
electric plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket. recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
The rear sensors are automatically reactivated when the the tow hook fitted when not towing a trailer, contact
your authorized dealer for the ParkSense system oper- Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
trailer's cable plug is removed. detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
ations update because the tow hook could be detected
ParkSense Usage Precautions as an obstacle by the sensors. sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
Some conditions may influence the performance of the
Side Distance Warning system:
WARNING!  The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
 Drivers must be careful when backing up even when Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an
NOTE:
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
 Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Park-
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park- pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, Sense.
Sense system operating properly. and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
 Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra- sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense. your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
 When you turn ParkSense off, the message to appear serious injury or death.
in the instrument cluster display will read “PARKSENSE
(Continued)
OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST ENABLING A ND D ISABLING T HE The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
and search for a parking space when the following
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST conditions are present:
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to

SYSTEM  Gear selector is in DRIVE.
 Ignition is in the RUN position.
assist the driver during parallel, perpendicular, and The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can
 ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
parallel park exit maneuvers by identifying a proper be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
parking space, providing audible/visual instructions, and Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch  Driver's door is closed.
controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park panel below the Uconnect display.  Rear liftgate is closed.
Assist system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the  The outer surface and the underside of the front and
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch
and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking maneuver mud, dirt or other obstruction.
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
once (LED turns on). Pushing the switch a second time will
 Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h). 4
disable the system (LED turns off).
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a NOTE:
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions: If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph
side or passenger side), as well as exiting a parallel (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will instruct the
parking space.  Parking maneuver is complete driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approxi-
NOTE:  Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when mately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
searching for a parking space driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the
 The driver is always responsible for controlling the
 Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
active steering guidance into the parking space NOTE:
must intervene as required.
 Steering wheel is touched during active steering guid- If the vehicle is driven above approximately 25 km/h
 The system is designed to assist the driver and not to
ance into the parking space (15 mph), the instrument cluster display will instruct the
substitute the driver.
 ParkSense Front/Rear Park Assist switch is pushed driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approxi-
 During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to  Driver's door is opened mately 30 km/h (18 mph), the system will cancel. The
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the  Rear liftgate is opened driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the
system will cancel, and the driver will be required to  Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Brake System ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
manually complete the parking maneuver. intervention When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
 The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. environ- The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
mental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. turn off if any of the above conditions are not present.
searching for a parking space that has surfaces that If the maneuver cannot be completed within the maximum
will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves). amount of shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
complete the maneuver manually.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING  The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected (your hands still removed from the steering wheel), you will
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/ be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
S PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION clear of anything that may be overhanging or position.
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tail- The system may then instruct the driver to wait for steering
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled,
gates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles). to complete before then instructing to check surroundings
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press or to
 When searching for a parking space, the driver should and move backward.
Switch Maneuver” message will appear in the instrument
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
cluster display. You may select perpendicular, parallel, or
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
parallel park exit. The arrow buttons on the left side of the
steering wheel can be used to switch parking maneuvers.  The system will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular or
parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
maneuver being performed).
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Active ParkSense Searching

NOTE:
 When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated. Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
 The driver needs to make sure that the selected
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
the steering wheel. When the vehicle comes to a standstill
The system may instruct several more gear shifts (DRIVE provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
and REVERSE), with hands off of the steering wheel, tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible CAUTION!
before instructing the driver to check surroundings and for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.  The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
complete the parking maneuver.  If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the maneuver reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle. obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
is complete and the driver will be instructed to check the might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
vehicle's parking position, then shift the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING! Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
The message "Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking  Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or not be detected when they are in close proximity.
Position" will be displayed momentarily. perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using  The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
NOTE: the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle, able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
 It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check is recommended that the driver looks over his/her 4
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc- shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
maneuver. tions, and blind spots before backing up and moving Assist system.
 It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop forward. You are responsible for safety and must
the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings continue to pay attention to your surroundings.
and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. EXITING THE PARKING S PACE
 When the system instructs the driver to remove their  Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist NOTE:
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
The function does not work for exiting a perpendicular
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly. mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from
parking space, but only exiting parallel parking spaces.
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
 The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a Activation
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehi-
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
cles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much To activate this function, push the ParkSense Active Park
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the Assist switch and then use the steering wheel arrow
the system will cancel and the instrument cluster
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the buttons to select the Parallel Park Exit feature. After the
display will instruct the driver to complete the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball selection, the system activates and instructs the driver
maneuver manually.
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a through the instrument cluster display about the
 The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle false indication that an obstacle is behind the operations that have to be carried out to perform the
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering vehicle. maneuver correctly.
guidance into the parking space. The system will
Selection Of The Maneuver Side obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it

Use the right and left arrow buttons on the steering wheel could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
to select between parallel or perpendicular parking mode. behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Then use the direction indicators (turn signals) to choose  Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
the direction that you want to perform the maneuver. tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
 Sensors may detect a nonexistent obstacle (echo
During the maneuver, the system asks the driver to shift to
noise) due to mechanical noises, for example while
REVERSE, and operate the turn signal in the direction you
washing the vehicle or in the case of rain, strong wind,
want to exit. Let go of the steering wheel and use the brake
and hail.
or accelerator pedals as instructed, while the system
handles the steering automatically for exiting the parking  The sensors may not detect objects of a particular
space. If the driver continues to carry out a voluntary or shape or made from particular materials (very thin
involuntary action on the steering wheel during the exit Check Surroundings — Move Forward poles, trailer beams, panels, nets, bushes, anti-parking
maneuver (touching or holding the steering wheel to posts, pavements, rubbish bins, motor vehicles, etc.).
End Of Maneuver Always take great care to check that the vehicle and its
prevent its movement), the maneuver will be interrupted.
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the display path are actually compatible with the parking place
shows the message of a completed maneuver. At the end identified by the system.
of the maneuver, the system gives back the vehicle control  The use of wheels and tires that are different size to the
to the driver. original equipment could affect the operation of the
system.
Important Information
 The operation of the rear sensors is automatically
 If the sensors undergo impact which alters their posi- deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is inserted
tion, the system operation could be greatly affected. in the vehicle's tow hook socket, while the front
 The sensors reach top performance after the vehicle sensors stay active and can provide acoustic and visual
has gone about 30 miles (50 km) due to the dynamic warnings. The rear sensors are automatically reacti-
tire circumference calculations used for parking. vated when the trailer's cable plug is removed.
 Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not  In "Search in Progress" mode, the system could incor-
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be rectly identify a parking place to carry out the
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. maneuver (e.g. by a junction, driveways, roads crossing
Failure to do so can result in the system not working the direction of travel, etc.).
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
 In the case of parking maneuvers on roads with an

incline, the performance of the system could be inferior
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Lane-
and it may deactivate. Sense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on the
 If a parking maneuver is being carried out between two
LANESENSE OPERATION steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the
parked vehicles alongside the pavement, the system The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the
may cause the vehicle to mount the pavement. 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does
 Some maneuvers at very tight bends might be impos- LaneSense system uses a forward facing camera to detect not return their hands to the wheel.
sible to be carried out. lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
 Take great care to ensure that conditions do not lane boundaries.
TURNING LANESENSE ON O R O FF
change during the parking maneuver (e.g. if there are When both lane markings are detected and the driver The LaneSense button is located on the center
persons and/or animals in the parking place, moving unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal stack.
vehicles, etc.) and intervene immediately if necessary. applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning 4
 During parking maneuvers, pay attention to vehicles in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
approaching from the opposite direction. Always abide prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
by the law and road regulations. the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane, button (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE: the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through
the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
 Correct system operation is not guaranteed if snow
remain within the lane boundaries. button once (LED turns on).
chains or the spare tire are fitted.
 The function only informs the driver about the last The driver may manually override the haptic warning by NOTE:
appropriate parking place (parallel or perpendicular) applying torque to the steering wheel at any time. The LaneSense system will retain the last system state on
detected by the parking sensors. When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
 Some messages displayed are accompanied by unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn changed to the ON/RUN position.
acoustic warnings. signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE

The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
Lane Approached Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)

(Flashing White To Gray Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)  When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
NOTE: tion, the left lane line turns solid white. The LaneSense
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this
a right lane departure when only the right lane marking time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
has been detected. opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane,
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
 When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale) from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected is solid green when both lane markings have been
 When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense tell- detected and the system is ready to provide visual
tale is solid white when only the left lane marking has warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque
been detected and the system is ready to provide warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an departure occurs.
unintentional lane departure occurs.
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left lane line flashes from white to gray, and the Lane-
Sense telltale changes from solid white to flashing
Lane Sensed (Solid White Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
yellow.
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped  When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left lane line flashes from white to gray and the Lane- when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected left lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the LaneSense
Sense telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing and the LaneSense telltale is solid white. telltale changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
yellow. At this time, torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane,
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale) Lane Approached

(Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
NOTE:
 When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense tell-
Lane Approached The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
tale is solid white when only the left lane marking has
a right lane departure when only the right lane marking
(Flashing White To Gray Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale) been detected and the system is ready to provide
has been detected.
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an
NOTE: unintentional lane departure occurs.
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
a right lane departure.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected

 When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane
departure occurs.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Telltale) Lane Approached

(Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the NOTE:
left lane line flashes yellow (on/off). The LaneSense The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At a right lane departure.
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary. CHANGING LANESENSE S TATUS
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity
steering wheel will turn to the right.
of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale) (early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect
system Ú page 116.
 When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left lane line turns solid yellow. The LaneSense NOTE:
telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this  When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
opposite direction of the lane boundary.  Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the  The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
steering wheel will turn to the right. whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes,
Traction Control System, Electronic Stability Control,
Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
REAR BACK UP CAMERA When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned on, the camera image will continue to be WARNING!
The Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an on-screen displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
image of your vehicle's rear surroundings when the gear exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestri-
on the touchscreen display along with a note to “Check When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, a ans, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After touchscreen X button is shown on the camera image in spots before backing up. You are responsible for the
five seconds, this note will disappear. The camera is order to disable the visualization earlier than 10 seconds. safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay
located above the rear license plate. attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
serious injury or death.
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of 4
CAUTION!
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for  To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up Camera
each zone: should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear Back
Up Camera is unable to view every obstacle or object
Distance To The Rear Of The in your drive path.
Zone
Vehicle
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) slowly when using the Rear Back Up Camera to be
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m) able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
Back Up Camera Location recommended that the driver look frequently over
3 ft or greater his/her shoulder when using the Rear Back Up
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera Green
(1 m or greater) Camera.
delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE VEHICLE LOADING

The Capless Fuel system uses a flapper placed at the filler
pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes automatically
CERTIFICATION LABEL
upon insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle. As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
The Capless Fuel system is designed so that it prevents Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification
the filling of an incorrect type of fuel. label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar Ú page 278.
Opening The Door This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
For filling, proceed as follows: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
1. Open the door, by pushing and releasing on the Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
indentation point indicated by the arrow. Filler Pipe included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel nozzle Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. bottom of the label is your VIN.
4. Before removing the nozzle, wait at least 10 seconds Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
to allow the fuel to flow inside of the tank. The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
5. Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then close the including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
door. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
WARNING! GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
 Do not to affix objects/plugs to the end of the filler Payload

neck other than what is provided on the car. The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
Fuel Filler Door  The use of objects/plugs that are not compatible weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
with the vehicle may cause pressure increases inside all passengers, options and cargo.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the
nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors while
the tank, creating dangerous conditions. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
refueling.  Do not approach the neck of the tank with open The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
flames or lit cigarettes; it is an extreme fire hazard. and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
Also, avoid close contact with the filler pipe with your area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
face; do not inhale harmful vapors.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
 Do not use your mobile phone in the vicinity of the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
pump fuel nozzle; it can be a possible risk of fire. springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS
increased durability do not necessarily increase the rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within
vehicle's GVWR. the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the you in understanding the following information:
Tire Size specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving. The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
Rim Size on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
exceed the GVWR Ú page 106.
the brakes operate.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
WARNING!
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all 4
Inflation Pressure Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
all loading conditions up to full GAWR. your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your ready for operation" condition.
vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Curb Weight The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
trailer must be supported by the scale.
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
TRAILER TOWING Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a In this section you will find safety tips and information on
trailer when weighed in combination.
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
added. vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
Loading possible.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by follow the requirements and recommendations in this rear GAWR Ú page 106.
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial WARNING!
scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
be determined separately to be sure that the load is front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW) Weight-Carrying Hitch contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight-distributing (load
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
your vehicle. other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium
Frontal Area sized trailers.
Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer. Weight-Distributing Hitch WARNING!
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage  An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for system may reduce handling, stability, braking
The TSC is a telescoping link that can be installed between heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow performance, and could result in a collision.
the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
provides adjustable friction associated with the accordance with vehicle manufacturer’s directions, it  Weight-distributing systems may not be compatible
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
swaying motions while traveling. steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control Vehicle dealer for additional information.
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT RATINGS)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)

1.3L Turbo 2,000 lb (906 kg) 200 lb (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire And Loading Infor-
mation Placard Ú page 278.
4
TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT Consider the following items when computing the weight TOWING REQUIREMENTS
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on  The tongue weight of the trailer. To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
your bumper or trailer hitch. components, the following guidelines are recommended:
 The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
WARNING!
 The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional possible:
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must  Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering
Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Placard for the cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
your vehicle. control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
Weight Distribution (Continued)
 An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is

WARNING! CAUTION! required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
 When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not over-  Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
loss of control, poor performance, or damage to or other parts could be damaged. brake controller is not required.
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-  Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
 Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
sion, chassis structure, or tires.
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) 2,000 lb (907 kg).
 Safety chains must always be used between your and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the WARNING!
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross heavier loads.
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough  Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
slack for turning corners. hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
Towing Requirements — Tires system and cause it to fail. You might not have
 Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a brakes when you need them and could have a colli-
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the  Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
sion.
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in spare tire.
PARK. Always block or "chock" the trailer wheels.  Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe  Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Ú page 284. distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
 GCWR must not be exceeded.  Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in
 Total weight must be distributed between the tow before trailer usage. front of you. Failure to do so could result in a colli-
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four  Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage sion.
ratings are not exceeded: before towing a trailer Ú page 284.
 GVWR  For the proper tire replacement procedures
Ú page 284. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying CAUTION!
 GTW capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
 GAWR GAWR limits. loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
 Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or effort, and longer stopping distances.
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And

Wiring (If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness. Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector 4
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle 1 — Ground 1 — Backup Lamps
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. 2 — Park 2 — Running Lamps
Refer to the following illustrations: 3 — Left Stop/Turn 3 — Left Stop/Turn
NOTE: 4 — Right Stop/Turn 4 — Ground
 Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the vehicle 5 — Battery
(or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical 6 — Right Stop/Turn
connectors) before launching a boat into water. 7 — Electric Brakes
 Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
TOWING TIPS Cruise Control — If Equipped NOTE:

 Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.  When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing the state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.  When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Automatic Transmission you can get back to cruising speed.  You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
 Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
maximize fuel efficiency. tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to RECREATIONAL TOWING programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
manually select a lower gear. RECREATIONAL TOWING
NOTE: TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy Models With Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
loading conditions will improve performance and extend
ANOTHER VEHICLE Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
Towing Wheels Off Front-Wheel Four-Wheel
buildup. This action will also provide better engine dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four
Condition The Ground Drive (FWD) Drive (4WD)
braking. wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this
NOT NOT procedure:
AutoStick Flat Tow NONE
ALLOWED ALLOWED
 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
 When using the AutoStick shift control, select the NOT NOT the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and REAR
ALLOWED ALLOWED  Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if Dolly Tow
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or NOT  Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the transmis-
FRONT OK sion in PARK. Turn the engine off.
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed. ALLOWED
 To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous BEST  Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
On Trailer ALL OK the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces- METHOD
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a  Turn the ignition to the RUN position, but do not start
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road the engine.
conditions allow.  Press and hold the brake pedal.
 Release the EPB.
 Turn the ignition OFF, and release the brake pedal.
CAUTION! DRIVING TIPS Driving Through Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water,
 DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
train will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make
ON-R OAD D RIVING T IPS there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water:
sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground. Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
 Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and narrower track to make them capable of performing in a CAUTION!
remains released, while being towed. wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require- conventional passenger cars. (8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
ments can cause severe transmission damage. a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
Damage from improper towing is not covered under through water may cause damage that may not be
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as 4
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
Models With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in Driving through water more than a few inches/
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle may be
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four
or vehicle rollover. bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
wheels are OFF the ground.
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
OFF-R OAD D RIVING TIPS controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
CAUTION!
to minimize wave effects.
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the ground
When To Use 4WD LOW
Flowing Water
can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off)
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
low-speed pulling power Ú page 78. This range should be flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water, avoid
limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water
sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed. can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into
Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
avoided when in 4WD LOW. downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water — Trailhawk Only Hill Climbing Traction Downhill

Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 19 inches NOTE: Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD System
(48 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the conditions to 4WD Low range or select Hill Descent Control (if
wave effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of at the crest and/or on the other side. equipped) Ú page 194 . Let the vehicle go slowly down
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
Maintenance lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD Low. Use first compression drag. This will permit you to control the
gear and 4WD Low for very steep hills. vehicle speed and direction.
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
Transfer Unit and Rear Drive Module) to ensure they have hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
not been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and apply the brakes. Restart the engine and shift to repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission
lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should be REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the whenever possible.
flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent
component damage.
compression braking of the engine to help regulate your After Driving Off-Road
speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any
WARNING!
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle
gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make ready when you need it.
mode, using 4WD Low if necessary Ú page 78. Do not it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to  Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction the vehicle. Always back straight down a hill in exhaust system for damage.
will be lost. REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill in
 Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because required.
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.  Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
NOTE: on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - drive suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to
straight up or down. the values specified in the Service Manual.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a  Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually propeller shafts.
provide traction to complete the climb.
 After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or

similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not
have full braking power when you need it to prevent a
collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty
conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as
necessary. 4
 If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
116
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
UCONNECT SETTINGS
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle. installed. the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
CYBERSECURITY WARNING! you to access and change the Customer Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
 ONLY insert trusted media devices/components into
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
send or receive information from a wired or wireless the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
network. This information allows systems and features in panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
your vehicle to function properly. located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
systems to be breached.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security through menus and change settings. Push the center of
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful  As always, if you experience unusual vehicle the control knob one or more times to select or change a
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately. setting.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and NOTE: MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
takes appropriate steps as needed. As always, if you To help further improve user experience, features,
experience unusual behavior, contact an authorized Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the
dealer immediately, Ú page 299, or refer to your breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for additional contact screen to turn the screen on.
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuco-
information. nnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
Uconnect software updates. certain option on the Uconnect system.
MULTIMEDIA 117
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE F EATURES Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button on When making a selection, only press one button at a time
the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this to enter the desired menu. Once in the desired menu,
mode, the Uconnect system allows you to access press and release the preferred setting option until a
programmable features. check mark appears next to the setting, showing that
NOTE: setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
may vary. the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
 All settings should be changed with the ignition in the down through the available settings.
ON/RUN position.
5
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen
language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and the Instrument Cluster
Language
Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
118 MULTIMEDIA
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available
settings are:
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it auto-
Display Mode matically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display brightness.
The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
Display Brightness With Headlights ON setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting will allow you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five sec-
Control Screen Timeout
onds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts This setting will turn the weather alerts on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 119
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument cluster
display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:

US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
This setting will change the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Con-
Custom sumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and
“Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
5
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:

This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief”
Voice Response Length setting provides a shortened audio description from the system. The “Detailed” setting
provides the full audio description from the system.
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and
Show Command List
provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the
Command List off.
120 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date

When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:

This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control
Sync Time With GPS
the time via the GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be
Time Format off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour for-
mat. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to
Set Time Hours
be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this set-
Set Time Minutes ting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will decrease
the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you can scroll
Set Date in Cluster
through the available days, months, or years.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:

ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out of REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the active backup camera guidelines on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 121
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ depending
on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options
related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:

This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view,
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system
signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will
5
deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime
Forward Collision Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an
audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane
LaneSense Warning
departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane
LaneSense Strength
departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting will adjust the warning for side distance. The available options are “Off”,
Side Distance Warning
“Sound Only”, and “Sound & Display”.
This setting will adjust the volume for side distance warning. The available options are
Side Distance Warning Volume
“Low”, “Med”, and “High”.
This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes,
Drowsy Driver Alert
indicating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and
ParkSense
can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
122 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will adjust the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings
Front ParkSense Volume
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
Rear ParkSense Volume
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will
Blind Spot Alert
activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting
will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Mirrors & Wipers

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
This setting will allow you to set the sensitivity of the headlights dependent on the
amount of visible light. The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation
Headlight Sensitivity required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the headlights turn
on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). The available levels are “Level 1: Minimum Sensitivity”,
“Level 2: Medium Sensitivity”, and “Level 3: Maximum Sensitivity”.
MULTIMEDIA 123
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is selected, a
Brake Service
pop-up will display with “Yes” and “No” options.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights. 5
NOTE:
 When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Interior Ambient Lighting This setting will allow you to adjust the interior ambient lighting using “+” and “-” options.
This setting will allow you to set the sensitivity of the headlights dependent on the
amount of visible light. The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation
Headlight Sensitivity required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the headlights turn
on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). The available levels are “Level 1: Minimum Sensitivity”,
“Level 2: Medium Sensitivity”, and “Level 3: Maximum Sensitivity”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
Headlight Off Delay after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
124 MULTIMEDIA

When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn
Cornering Lights signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant
side to improve visibility at night.
When the “Greeting Lights” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of
Greeting Lights time the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
Flash Lights with Lock
on the key fob on or off.
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:

Auto Door Locks This setting will automatically lock your doors.
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
Flash Lights With Lock
on the key fob on or off.
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off”
setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting
Sound Horn With Lock
will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
MULTIMEDIA 125

Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed
to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one
push of the Unlock button.
Seats & Comfort

When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or the
vehicle has been started.
NOTE: 5

This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats (if equipped) or
heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start”
setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start”
setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
126 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options

When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is set to
OFF.
NOTE:

This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after vehicle shut off.
Radio Off Delay
The available options are “0 sec” or “20 min”.
This setting will shut the radio off when the door is opened. The available settings are
Radio Off With Door
“On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
Headlight Off Delay after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:

This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right
Balance/Fade
of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume
Speed Adjusted Volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 127

This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The
AUX Volume Offset
available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started. The available
Auto-On Radio settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the system resumes the
previous task before vehicle shut off.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu. 5
NOTE:

Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply”
Do Not Disturb (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply
Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Projection Manager This setting will activate your smartphone to project on the vehicle’s touchscreen.
128 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio
channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
 A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
Tune Start
channel using one of the 12 presets.
This setting will allow you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display
Channel Skip
of the skipped channels.
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a
Subscription Information
separate subscription.
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can clear
personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:

Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Restore Apps This setting will reset the apps to their factory defaults.
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
“Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from
Clear Personal Data
the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
MULTIMEDIA 129
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM O VERVIEW
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display

1 — Radio/Media Button 5 — Navigation Button (If Equipped)
2 — Climate Button 6 — Phone Button
3 — Apps Button 7 — Settings Button
4 — Controls Button
130 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and
Radio/Media
access the radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 132.
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone
Phone
system Ú page 143.
Settings Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 116.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on
the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio
station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it
again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off button on the
faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the
radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from freezing.
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated seats and
Controls — If Equipped
steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Mobile apps.
MULTIMEDIA 131
Feature Description
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate control functions
Climate
Ú page 39.
Press the Nav button to enter Navigation Mode and use the system’s built-in Navigation
Nav (Navigation) — If Equipped
software Ú page 157.
DRAG & D ROP MENU B AR SAFETY AND G ENERAL I NFORMATION  When driving, looking at the touchscreen should only
be done by a glance when safe to do so. If prolonged
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar Safety Guidelines viewing of the screen is required, choose a safe and
are easily customized for your preference. Simply follow secure location where you can pull over and park safely
these steps: WARNING! to do so.
 Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. so may cause injury or damage to the product. See an
Your complete attention is always required while driving authorized dealer for repair. 5
to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only use and  Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level
interact with the features and applications when it is that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emer-
safe to do so. Failure to follow these warnings can gency vehicles.
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury. Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
 The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic
Please read this manual carefully before using the system. device. Do not let young children use the system.
It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe  Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your
and effective manner. music or sound system at loud volumes. Exercise
caution when setting the volume on the system.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so
 Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture away
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Drag & Drop from the system. Besides damage to the system, mois-
Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to ture can cause electric shocks as with any electronic
1. Press the Apps button to open the App screen. do so may result in injury or property damage. device.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app to replace  Become familiar with the Uconnect features and appli- NOTE:
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar. cations in this vehicle before you drive on the roadway Many features of this system are speed dependent. For
so using Uconnect will be more intuitive and will not your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touch-
NOTE: require prolonged viewing of the screen while you are screen features while the vehicle is in motion.
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK. driving.
132 MULTIMEDIA
Care And Maintenance The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push RADIO MODE
button in the center and controls the volume and mode of
 Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp
objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could
the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will Radio Controls
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
scratch the surface. switch will decrease the volume.
 Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the
screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
cloth in order to clean the touchscreen. the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
 If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a
cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be button in the center. The function of the left-hand control
sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions is different depending on which mode you are in.
and directions Ú page 303. The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode:
UCONNECT MODES Radio Operation
STEERING W HEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear seek down for the next available station. Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock The button located in the center of the left-hand control 1 — Preset Radio Stations
positions. will tune to the next preset station that you have 2 — Map
programmed in the radio presets. 3 — View Next Preset Radio Station
Media Mode 4 — Status Bar
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track on the 5 — Browse
selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the 6 — Source Select (If Equipped With 4C/4C NAV)/Radio
switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing the Bands
bottom switch goes to the beginning of the current track, 7 — Seek Down
or the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight 8 — Tune
seconds after the current track begins to play. Double
9 — Seek Up
pressing the bottom button switch will skip to the previous
track if it is after eight seconds into the current track. 10 — HD Radio™ (If Equipped)
11 — Audio Settings
Remote Sound System Controls 12 — Bottom Menu Bar
MULTIMEDIA 133
The radio is equipped with the following modes: Seek Undo

 AM The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing You can backspace an entry by pressing the Back
 FM the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right button on the touchscreen.
 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Equipped) and left of the radio station display or by pushing the left GO
steering wheel audio control button up or down.
Press the Radio button or Media button on the Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press
touchscreen to enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner Seek Up and Seek Down “Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and the system will
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected by Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down automatically tune to that station.
pressing the corresponding button in Radio Mode. button to tune the radio to the next available station or
Volume & On/Off Control channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
reaches the starting station after passing through the
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on and off Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM®
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station
the Uconnect system. Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear.
where it began.
The electronic volume control turns continuously (Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down required.)
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob clockwise Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up or Seek Push the VR button on the steering wheel and wait for 5
increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases it. Down button to advance the radio through the the beep to say a command. See an example:
available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set  “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
stops at the next available station or channel when the
at the same volume level as last played.  “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
button on the touchscreen is released.
If equipped, your radio has the ability to perform a forced Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of what
NOTE: to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
reset. This can be achieved by pushing and holding the
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or Seek button and say “Help”. The system provides you with a
VOLUME & On/Off control knob for 10 seconds. This
Down button will scan the different frequency bands at list of commands.
feature is helpful if the radio freezes or crashes.
a slower rate.
Mute Button
Direct Tune HD Radio™ — If Equipped
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the system. HD Radio™ technology is the digital evolution of analog
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the radio
Tune/Scroll Control screen to directly tune to a desired radio station or AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver, which
channel. allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
addition to the analog broadcasts. Digital broadcasts
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station Press the available number button on the touchscreen to provide free, crystal clear audio with no static or distortion.
frequency. Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has
selection. been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible For more information and a guide to available stations and
(stations that cannot be reached) will become programming, please visit hdradio.com.
deactivated/grayed out.
134 MULTIMEDIA
To begin using HD Radio™: When HD Radio™ broadcasts are active, you can access However, if you are listening to any of the possible
1. Press the Media Button. the following functions: multicast (HD2-HD8) channels, the station will mute and
 Seek Up And Down: Press to seek to the next strong stay muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
2. Select the AM or FM tab. again. While in this state, the text “buffering” will appear
radio station. If the current station has multiple digital
3. Select the HD button. broadcasts, the multicast indicator numbers will for 30 seconds. If it is not able to reconnect to the digital
display. Press “Seek” repeatedly to advance through all signal, the screen will be cleared and “HD Radio™ Signal
When HD Radio™ reception is enabled and a station with
available broadcasts. If you are on the last multicast Unavailable” will appear in artist and title field area.
HD Radio™ broadcasts is playing, the following indicators
may appear on the screen: channel, press “Seek Up” to advance to the next strong Station Blending: When an HD1 station is received, the
station. system will play the analog audio broadcast from the
 HD Radio™ Logo: This indicator will display in gray
 Saving A Multicast Station As A Preset: When the station for a few seconds and then, if the receiver verifies
when a digital station is being acquired and will appear
channel is active on-screen, press and hold a Preset the station is an HD Radio™ station, it will transition to play
in orange and white when digital audio is playing. When
button; it will save the station to the available slot. the digital audio broadcast. Depending on the station
this logo is available, you will also see Station Call Sign
When recalling an HD2-HD8. memory preset, there will quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the
(e.g. WNIC), Title and Artist fields on screen.
be a momentary mute before the digital audio is played station transitions from analog to the digital broadcast.
 Multicast Indicator (1 2 3...): These numbers will The shift from analog to digital or digital back to analog
as the system acquires the digital signal. If you have
appear if the current station has multiple digital broad- sound is known as “blending”.
turned this feature off, this will automatically turn on
casts. Press the Seek Up or Down button repeatedly to
HD Radio™ broadcasts and will tune to the selected Station Issues: In order to provide the best possible
access the other digital broadcasts. The numbers that
frequency. As with any saved radio station, you will not experience, a contact form has been developed to report
are highlighted signify available digital channels where
be able to access the saved station if your vehicle is any station issues found while listening to a station
new/different content is available. HD1 will signify the
outside the station’s reception area. broadcasting with HD Radio™ technology. Every station is
main programming service and is available in analog
 “LIVE” Ballgame Mode Broadcasts: If a station has a independently owned and operated. These stations are
and digital broadcasts. Any additional multicast
live broadcast (such as a baseball game), “LIVE” may responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields
stations (HD2-HD8) are only broadcast digitally.
appear on screen beside the multicast numbers. These are accurate. This form can be found at https://
 Album Art/Station Logo: Some HD Radio™ stations
are analog broadcasts with digital components (i.e. hdradio.com/stations/feedback.
broadcast station logos and album art associated with
artist, title). If HD1 is in a live broadcast mode, the HD
the song being played as part of the HD Radio™ broad-
Radio™ logo will be gray. You will hear analog audio;
cast service. Station logo art is stored in the radio and
the user will still be able to tune to the multicast chan-
may take up to five minutes to learn for each station
nels.
that supports station logo service. Album art is broad-
cast at the beginning of songs. If tuning into the middle Reception Area: If you are listening to a multicast
of a song, the art may not be available. (HD2-HD8) station and you are on the fringe of the
reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal
strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system will simply
switch to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast
is available again.
MULTIMEDIA 135
Troubleshooting
Experience Cause Action
Mismatch of time alignment — a user may hear a short
The radio station’s analog and digital volume is not None. It is a radio broadcast issue. The user can contact
period of programming replayed or an echo, stutter, or
properly aligned or the station is in ballgame mode. the station.
skip.
Reception issue: It may clear up as the vehicle continues
Sound fades, blending in and out. Radio is shifting between analogue and digital audio. to be driven. Turning off HD Radio™ can force the radio to
use analogue audio.
Audio mute condition when an HD2-HD8 multicast The radio does not have access to digital signals at the This is normal behavior. Wait until the digital signal
channel is playing. moment. returns. If out of coverage area, seek a new station.
The digital multicast content is not available until HD
Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2-HD8 multicast This is normal behavior. Wait until the audio is available
Radio™ broadcast can be decoded and make the audio
channel preset.
available. This can take up to seven seconds.
again. 5
Text information does not match the present song audio or
Broadcaster should be notified. Use the form at https://
no text information shown for the present selected Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.
hdradio.com/stations/feedback/
frequency.
HD Radio™ Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. US and Foreign Patents. For patents, see http://dts.com/patents. HD Radio™, Artist Experience,
and the HD, HD Radio™, and "ARC" logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
136 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
after the trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If
If Equipped you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription, US
residents visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or
subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew call: 1-800-643-2112
and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call:
Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) 1-888-539-7474.
or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). NOTE:
All fees and programming subject to change. SiriusXM® You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located at
satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our SiriusXM® The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM
satellite service is also available in Canada and Puerto button on the touchscreen.
Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
When in Satellite Mode:
service is available throughout their satellite service area
and in AK. © 2022 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and  The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.
all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®  The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of the
Radio Inc. screen.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Changing  The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the
This functionality is only available for radios equipped with
To SiriusXM® a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the center.
NOTE: vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.  The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of
Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all the Channel Number.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might have to
SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song and change the vehicle’s position in order to receive a signal.  The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below
artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune start, and In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal the Program Information.
others. in underground parking garages or tunnels. Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
No Subscription
broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast-to-coast In addition to the tuning operation functions common to
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service. all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/Weather button, and
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the radio
Visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or review Favorite button functions are available in SiriusXM®
does not have the necessary subscription, the radio is
your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s Manual Mode.
able to receive the Preview channel only.
kit for more information.
MULTIMEDIA 137
1 — Browse REPLAY
2 — Replay Replay provides a means to store and replay up to
3 — Seek Down Button 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio.
Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is
4 — Direct Tune Button
lost.
5 — Seek Up Button
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/
6 — Traffic & Weather Button (If Equipped)
Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at
7 — Audio Settings Button the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the
touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display SiriusXM®

Satellite Radio 5
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or rewound
Play/Pause content at any time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on the
touchscreen.
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Rewind Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the
content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released.
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five
seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is previously
Forward rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward
button on the touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins playing the content
at the point at which the press is released.
Live Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live content.
138 MULTIMEDIA
FAVORITES BROWSE IN SXM All

Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to activate Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When pressing
the favorites menu, which will time out within 20 seconds the All button, the following categories become available:
in absence of user interaction.  Channel List: Press the Channel List to display all the
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X button. SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the
Channel List by pressing the Up and Down arrows,
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist or located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can
song that is currently playing. The radio then uses this also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
information to alert you when either the favorite artist or
 Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touchscreen
song is being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
to display a list of Genres. You can select any desired
Channels.
Genre by pressing the Genre List. The radio tunes to a
The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in channel with the content in the selected Genre.
the Radio is 50. Presets — If Equipped
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a favorite Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at the left of
artist, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and the Browse screen.
then the Favorite Artist button on the touchscreen. Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Browse Button
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up and
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a favorite 1 — All Button
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
song, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and 2 — Presets Button Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
then the Favorite Song button on the touchscreen. 3 — Favorites Button knob as well.
4 — Game Zone Button Preset Selection
TRAFFIC & WEATHER — AVAILABLE ON THE 4C
NAV (IF EQUIPPED) A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the
Press the Traffic & Weather button on the touchscreen to Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted
tune to a SiriusXM® Traffic and Weather channel. To set a with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List. Preset. When selected, the Radio tunes to the station
Traffic & Weather alert for any one of the cities in the Jump
This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit stored in the Preset.
Browse list Ú page 138.
submenus to return to a parent menu by pressing the Deleting A Preset
If the Traffic & Weather alert city is not set, you are Back arrow.
presented with a pop-up to allow you to select the favorite A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by
city using the Browse screen. pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.
MULTIMEDIA 139
Favorites Select Team — If Equipped Setting Presets

Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen. Press the Select Team button on the touchscreen to
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the Favorites activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league
list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear,
providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding
items in the Favorites list. box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen. Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
knob as well. all of the selections or press the Trash Can icon next to the
Remove Favorites selection to be deleted.
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen. Alert Settings
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The
all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from “Alert me to 5
Favorite to be deleted. on-air games upon start” or “Alert upon score update” or Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Radio Presets
Alert Settings both when one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels. The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Favorites activated by pressing any of the Preset buttons, located at
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from Tune Start the top of the screen.
a visual alert or audible and visual alert when one of your Tune Start begins playing the current song from the When you are on a station that you wish to save as a
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels. beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of preset, press and hold the numbered button on the
Game Zone the 12 presets. This feature occurs the first time the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
preset is selected during that current song.
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio
Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to Saving Presets To A Driver Memory Modes.
select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts. Profile — If Equipped A total of six presets will appear on the screen. You can
On-Air After setting/changing the desired radio presets, your switch between the radio presets list by pressing the Arrow
updates will be saved under the current active profile button located in the upper right of the radio touchscreen.
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list
provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items automatically. Seat alignment will not be saved
in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the automatically.
list tunes the radio to that channel.
140 MULTIMEDIA
PRESET FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in the
Presets.
Browse In AM/FM
Deleting Presets
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides a
means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by
the ENTER/BROWSE button. pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.
Scrolling Preset List Return To Main Radio Screen
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll the You can return to the Main Radio Screen by pressing the X
preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL knob or by button or the Back Arrow button when in the Browse
pressing the Up or Down Arrow key, located on the right of Presets screen.
the screen. Audio Settings
Preset Selection From List Press the Audio button within the settings main menu to
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed activate the Audio Settings screen. Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button or the The audio settings can also be accessed on the Radio
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted Mode screen by pressing the Audio button. You can return
Preset. to the Radio screen by pressing the X button.
Audio Setting Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front
Balance/Fade speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear,
Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Press the + or - button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the
Equalizer equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at
the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This
alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Volume increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road
noise.
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a
Surround Sound
movie theatre or home theatre system.
MULTIMEDIA 141
Audio Setting Description

The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and - buttons. This alters the AUX input
AUX Volume Offset audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed
above the adjustment bar.
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is connected
Auto Play to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press “Off” to turn the
setting off.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
Radio Off With Door
passenger door is opened or until the “Radio Off Delay” selected time has expired.
MEDIA M ODE 4 — Info You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info button
on the touchscreen for artist information on the current
5 — Shuffle
Operating Media Mode 6 — Browse
song playing. 5
7 — Tracks Browse Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Audio Source Selection
Overview
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source Select
button on the touchscreen and the desired mode button USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into the
on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the USB port, by selecting the USB button on the left side of
Media sources available. When available, you can select the touchscreen, or by selecting the Source Select/Select
the Browse button on the touchscreen to be given these Source button and then selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).
options:
BLUETOOTH® MODE
 Now Playing
 Artists Overview
 Albums Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is
 Genres entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing music,
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Operating Media Mode to the Uconnect system.
 Songs
1 — Repeat  Playlists Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired
2 — Source Select (If Equipped With 4C/4C NAV)  Folders to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect
3 — Track Time system.
142 MULTIMEDIA
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® button Controlling The Auxiliary Device supported by the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
on the left side of the touchscreen or under the Source Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired button on the
Select/Select Source button (if equipped). using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port touchscreen on the left side of the screen. The center of
or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the the browse window shows items and their sub-functions,
touchscreen, or under the Source Select button (if which can be scrolled through by pressing the Up and
equipped). Down buttons to the right. The TUNE/SCROLL knob can
also be used to scroll.
NOTE:
Media Mode
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control In USB Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen
on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insuffi- to select the desired audio source: USB.
cient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on the
the device. touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
Seek Up /Seek Down Bluetooth®.
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device. to select the desired audio source: AUX.
Press and release the Seek Down button on the Repeat
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Source Select touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the touchscreen
selection, or to return to the beginning of the previous to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on
AUX MODE selection if the USB device is within the first three seconds the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will
Overview of the current selection. continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Up the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button again to
using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port, button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the enter Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat function
touchscreen or under the Source Select button (if button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of is active. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat button a
equipped). the current selection, or return to the beginning of the third time.
previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the Shuffle
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the Auxiliary
first second of the current selection.
device cable into the AUX port. If you insert an Auxiliary In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen
device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will Browse to play the selections on the USB device in random order
switch to AUX Mode and begin to play. In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the touchscreen to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
to display the browse window. In USB Mode, the left side button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this
of the browse window displays a list of ways you can feature off.
browse through the contents of the USB device. If
MULTIMEDIA 143
Audio Push the VR button located on the steering wheel.  Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming Calls,”
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the Audio After the beep, say one of the following commands and “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,” or “Show
button Ú page 132. follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose Recent Calls”).
an artist:  Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Info Smith Mobile”).
 “Change source to Bluetooth®”
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the touchscreen to  “Change source to AUX” Screen Activated Features
display the current track information. Press the Info or X
 “Change source to USB”  Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel this
 “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”;  Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
feature.
“Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical” displayed on the touchscreen.
Tracks
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the  Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they are
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device. easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The song currently Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist,  Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
playing is indicated by an arrow and lines above and below album, song, and genre information is displayed.  Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.
the song title. When in the Tracks List screen you can
rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight a track PHONE MODE  Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access 5
to connect to them quickly.
(indicated by the line above and below the track name)
and then push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing Overview NOTE:
that track. Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device supports in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to dial a
this feature, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen phone number with your mobile phone. Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
The feature supports the following:
playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines above your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
Voice Activated Features
and below the song title. For Uconnect customer support:
 Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile”
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the  US visit UconnectPhone.com or call 877-855-8400
or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.  Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
 Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS SMS messages.
800-387-9983
 Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward one of
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and 18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/text Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only available for messages. system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
connected USB and AUX devices. vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone
 Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
for private conversation.
 Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
144 MULTIMEDIA
The button on your steering wheel is also used to access commands: “Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
WARNING! the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering features if your vehicle is equipped. best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
Phone Operation from you.
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it
OPERATION NATURAL SPEECH
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death. Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Phone and to navigate its menu structure. Voice Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
commands are required after most Uconnect Phone
The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth® prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features Command works: phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
Bluetooth® technology — the global standard that enables certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” and
different electronic devices to connect to each other 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I would like
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you phone is mobile”. to”.
turned on with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to 2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio guide you to complete the task. sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
devices are allowed to be linked to the system. Only one Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
guided through the available options.
be used with the system at a time. provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
 Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
Phone Button do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The Phone button on your steering wheel is prompt.
used to get into the Phone Mode and make  For certain operations, compound commands can be The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then requires more information from the user, it will ask a
view phonebook, etc. When you push the “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following question to which the user can respond without pushing
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give compound command can be said: “Call John Smith the Voice Command button on the steering wheel.
a command. mobile.”
Voice Command Button  For each feature explanation in this section, only the
HELP COMMAND
The Voice Command button on your steering compound command form of the voice command is If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you given. You can also break the commands into parts and your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the beep.
are already in a call or want to make another say each part of the command when you are asked for To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
call. it. For example, you can use the compound command Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you command or say “Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a
can break the compound command form into two voice push of the VR button or the Phone button.
MULTIMEDIA 145
CANCEL COMMAND 3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.

At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and 4. Search for available devices on your
you will be returned to the main menu. Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button on your  Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
steering wheel when the system is listening for a  Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled.
command and be returned to the main or previous menu. Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to
search for Bluetooth® connections.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
NOTE:
PHONE During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
Use this QR code to access your digital your touchscreen asking you to make sure the PIN on the
experience. touchscreen matches the PIN from the pop-up on your
mobile phone.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone,
you must pair your compatible Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display 5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to pair a
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing or Settings 5
NOTE:
Mobile phone pairing is the process of button from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
establishing a wireless connection  You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.  Press the Paired Phones and Audio Devices
between a cellular phone and the button and then press the Paired Phones button.
Uconnect system.  The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow these steps to pair your phone:  Search for available devices on your
To complete the pairing process, you will need to Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please visit 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect” and
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone 2. Press the Phone button. accept the connection request.
compatibility information.
NOTE: 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen
while the system is connecting.
 If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you 7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system,
would like to pair a mobile phone. select “Uconnect.”
 This pop-up only appears when the user enters 8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the
Phone Mode and no other device(s) have previ- connection request from Uconnect.
ously been paired. If the system has a phone previ- 9. When the pairing process has successfully
ously paired, even if no phone is currently completed, the system will prompt you to choose
connected with the system, this pop-up will not whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting
appear. “Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This
146 MULTIMEDIA
phone will take precedence over other paired phones PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO NOTE:
within range and will connect to the Uconnect system DEVICE For devices which are not made a favorite, the device
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio device 1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to begin. The most recent device paired will have the higher priority.
can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. 2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”. You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones”
If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen to to bring up a list of paired audio devices.
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
Bluetooth® device. 4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
NOTE: NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone If there is no device currently connected with the system, Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. a pop-up will appear. priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range. If
The most recent phone paired will have the higher priority. you need to choose a particular phone or audio device
5. Search for available devices on your follow these steps:
NOTE: Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When prompted
on the device, confirm the PIN shown on the 1. Press the Phone Pairing button on the touchscreen.
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
your mobile phone for the Uconnect system to access your Uconnect screen. 2. Press the Paired Phones and Audio Devices button
“messages” and “contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process screen and then press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
sync your contacts with the Uconnect system. while the system is connecting. button.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones” 7. When the pairing process has successfully 3. Press to select the particular phone or the particular
to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on completed, the system will prompt you to choose audio device. A pop-up menu will appear; press
the radio. whether or not this is your favorite device. Selecting “Connect Phone”.
NOTE: “Yes” will make this device the highest priority. This 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system device will take precedence over other paired devices
may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this within range.
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first
make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on
your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect
from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth®
settings.
MULTIMEDIA 147
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
AUDIO DEVICE FAVORITE example, after you start the vehicle.
 A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen, press per contact will be downloaded and updated every time
the Settings button located to the right of the device a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.
name for a different phone or audio device than the  Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
currently connected device or press the preferred loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
“Connected Phone” from the list. downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen; able for use.
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the  Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
list. phone is accessible.
 This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- 5
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE phone connection.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has the MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
button. ability to download contact names and number entries There are two ways you can add an entry to your favorites:
2. Press the Paired Phones and Audio Devices button from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth®
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the
and then press Paired Phones or Audio Sources Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may support this
Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press
button. feature. Your mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking
one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that
for permission for the Uconnect system to access your
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the appears on the list.
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
device name for a different phone or audio device 2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
than the currently connected device or press the “Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and then
preferred Connected Phone from the list. See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for
select the appropriate number. Press the Down Arrow
supported phones.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. button or the Settings Gear button next to the
 To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook selected number to display the option’s pop-up. In the
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete Device
button on the touchscreen. Ú page 151. pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
 Automatic download and update of a phonebook, if NOTE:
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an
existing favorite.
148 MULTIMEDIA
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED CALL CONTROLS Other phone call features include:
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from the The touchscreen allows you to control the following call  End Call
Phone main screen. features:  Hold/Unhold/Resume
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the Settings Gear  Swap two active calls
icon next to the contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for that KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
Favorite contact. 1. Press the Phone button.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite. 2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen.
Phone Call Features 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
The following features can be accessed through the 4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and enter the number and press “Dial/Call”.
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
calling, this feature can be accessed through the You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the
Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider following call types:
for the features that you have.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display  All Calls
Here are the phone options with Uconnect:  Incoming Calls or Calls Received
1 — Answer
 Redial  Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
 Dial by pressing in the number 2 — Ignore/Decline  Missed Calls
 Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by 3 — Mute/Unmute
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Calls
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back) 4 — Transfer button on the phone main screen.
 Favorites 5 — Join Calls
You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel
 Mobile Phonebook and perform the operation. For example, say “Show my
 Recent Call Log incoming calls”.
 SMS Message Viewer
MULTIMEDIA 149
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — NOTE:

NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the touch-
screen while typing a custom message.
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the If a call is currently in progress and you have another
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system. incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be selected
Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile so you can still place a second call without being
Answer button on the touchscreen. phone. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, interrupted by incoming calls.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the current press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the NOTE:
call on hold or answer the incoming call. Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer  Reply with text message is not compatible with
the incoming call. iPhone® devices.
NOTE:  Auto reply with text message is only available on
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect system in phones that support Bluetooth® Message Access
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call Profile (MAP).
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it. PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD 5
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold button
DO NOT DISTURB
on the Phone main screen.
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, CALL IS IN PROGRESS
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while Do Not Disturb is active. You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent calls,
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
1 — Answer Button and send it to voicemail.
2 — Caller ID Box Automatic reply messages can be:
 “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly”.
 Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
ters.
150 MULTIMEDIA
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS REDIAL Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Push the VR button and after the “Listening” Phone
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number VOICE COMMAND
that was dialed from your mobile phone. For the best performance:
CALL CONTINUATION  Always wait for the beep before speaking

 Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been you
switched to OFF.  Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a
NOTE: voice command period
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until  Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth®  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
connection. It is recommended to press the Transfer  Low Road Noise
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.  Smooth Road Surface
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), Advanced Phone Connectivity  Fully Closed Windows
press the Swap Calls button on the phone main screen.  Dry Weather Conditions
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the PHONE WARNING!
active and held phone call. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without terminating have full responsibility and assume all risks related to
JOIN CALLS the use of the Uconnect features and applications in
the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so.
hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the Phone the Transfer button on the Phone main screen. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving
main screen to combine all calls into a conference call. serious injury or death.
CALL TERMINATION Even though the system is designed for many languages
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call and accents, the system may not always work for some.
button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the
steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and
if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
MULTIMEDIA 151
NOTE: Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to say a PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
It is recommended that you do not store names in your command. Here are some examples:
Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion. Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or
 “Call John Smith” 10, 15, 20, 25,
Number and name recognition rate is optimized when the  “Dial 123 456 7890” Are you there
entries are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” Call me. 30, 45, 60>
 “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number) yet? minutes late.
(zero).
 “Call back” (call previously answered incoming phone
Even though international dialing for most number I need See you in 5 <or
number) I’ll call you later.
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number directions. 10, 15, 20, 25,
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, push 30, 45, 60>
combinations may not be supported.
the Phone button and say “Call”, then pronounce the I’m on my way. Can’t talk right minutes.
Audio Performance name exactly as it appears in your phonebook. When a now.
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call I’m lost. Thanks.
Audio quality is maximized under:
John Smith work”.
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
NOTE:
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed VOICE TEXT REPLY — IF EQUIPPED
 Low Road Noise
Only use the numbering listed in the provided table. 5
Uconnect can announce incoming text messages. Push Otherwise, the system will not transpose the message.
 Smooth Road Surface
the VR button or Phone button and say: Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full
 Fully Closed Windows
1. “Listen” to have the system read an incoming text implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to
 Dry Weather Conditions take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
message. (Must have compatible mobile phone
 Operation From The Driver's Seat UconnectPhone.com.
paired to Uconnect system.)
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading incoming
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the 2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has been
read. text messages only. For further information on how to
Uconnect Phone. enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, re- iPhone® “User Manual”.
the in-vehicle audio volume. peat one of the predefined messages and follow the
system prompts. Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes
PHONE VOICE COMMANDS Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check Start without
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and No. I’ll be late.
me.
pairing instructions.
152 MULTIMEDIA
SIRI® EYES FREE — IF EQUIPPED ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — plug your device in the app begins to download. Your
vehicle should be in PARK the first time you use the
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected to your
vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use your voice to send IF EQUIPPED app.
text messages, select media, place phone calls and much NOTE:
more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what ANDROID AUTO™ Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came
you mean and responds back to confirm your requests. with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.
The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and Use this QR code to access your digital
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform experience.
useful tasks. Android Auto™ is a feature of your
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect Uconnect system, and your Android™
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After 6.0 or higher powered smartphone
you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts with a data plan, that allows you to
and music, get directions, read text messages, and many project your smartphone and a number
other useful requests. of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ brings you useful information, and
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK organizes it into simple cards that appear just when they
are needed. Android Auto™ can be used with speech
Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs and
Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio display’s
be re-established by restarting the mobile phone. Your touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android
mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® Auto™, perform the following procedure: Android Auto™
ON Mode.
NOTE:
1 — LTE Data Coverage
POWER-UP Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may 2 — Android Auto™ Icon
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON/ or may not be available in every region and/or language.
RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the Google NOTE:
wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system
Play store on your Android™-powered smartphone. To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an area with
Ú page 303.
cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may use cellular data
2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone to one
and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right
of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the Android
corner of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.
Auto™ app was not downloaded, the first time you
MULTIMEDIA 153
3. Once the device is connected and recognized, the While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™ provides For further information, refer to https://
Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to voice-guided: support.google.com/androidauto.
the Android Auto™ icon.  Navigation Communication
NOTE:  Live traffic information
With Android Auto™ connected, push and hold
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately once a  Lane guidance the VR button on the steering wheel to activate
compatible device is connected. You can also launch it by NOTE: voice recognition specific to Android Auto™.
pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the touchscreen. A pop-up also appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if This allows you to send and reply to text
NOTE: Android Auto™ is currently in use and you attempt to messages, have incoming text messages read out loud,
The automatic launching of Android Auto™ can be deacti- launch a built-in Uconnect route. Selecting “Yes” switches and place and receive hands-free calls.
vated through the Smartphone Projection Manager setting the navigation type to the newly used method of navi-
Ú page 156. gation and a route is planned for the new destination. If Apps
“No” is selected, the navigation type remains unchanged. The Android Auto™ App displays all the compatible apps
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your Uconnect
For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/ that are available to use with Android Auto™, every time it
system, the following features can be utilized using your
is launched. You must have the compatible app
smartphone’s data plan: (US) or https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app through 5
(Canada).
 Google Maps™ for navigation your mobile device for it to work with Android Auto™.
 YouTube Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music For further information on the navigation function, please
refer to https://support.google.com/android or https:// Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/ to see the
 Hands-free calling and texting for communication latest list of available apps for Android Auto™.
support.google.com/androidauto/.
 Various compatible apps
Music Android Auto™ Voice Command
Maps
Android Auto™ allows you to access and NOTE:
Push and hold the Voice Recognition (VR) Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
button on the steering wheel until the beep or stream your favorite music with apps like
YouTube Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may
tap the Microphone icon to ask Google to take or may not be available in every region and/or language.
you to a desired destination by voice. You can Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can
also touch the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access stream endless music on the road. Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to interact with
other navigation apps. NOTE: its best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle’s
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data
NOTE: plan to project your Android™-powered smartphone and a
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the built-in smartphone prior to using Android Auto™ for them to work
with Android Auto™. number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen.
Uconnect Navigation system (if equipped) will launch Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher to one of the media
instead of Android Auto™ Google Maps™. NOTE: USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and
To see the track details for the music playing through Android press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your
Auto™, select the Uconnect system’s media screen. Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™.
154 MULTIMEDIA
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or NOTE:

press and hold the Microphone icon within Android Auto™, Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
to activate its VR, which recognizes natural voice phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may
commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features: or may not be available in every region and/or language.
 Maps To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using iPhone®
 Music 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your
 Phone iPhone® is unlocked for the very first connection only, and
 Text Messages then use the following procedure:
 Additional Apps 1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media USB
NOTE: ports in your vehicle.
 To use Android Auto™ on your car display, you’ll need NOTE:

an Android™ phone running Android™ 6.0 or higher, an Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that
active data plan, and the Android Auto™ app. came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not
Apple CarPlay®
 To wirelessly use Android Auto™ on your car display, work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the 1 — LTE Data Coverage
you need a compatible Android™ smartphone with an
active data plan. You can check which smartphones Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to 2 — Apple CarPlay® Icon
are compatible at g.co/androidauto/requirements. the Apple CarPlay® Icon.
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. NOTE: NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. You can also To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular data is
APPLE C ARPLAY® launch it by pressing the Apple CarPlay® icon on the turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular
Use this QR code to access your digital touchscreen. coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the
experience. left side of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Uconnect
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure system, the following features can be utilized using your
way to use your iPhone® in the car, and iPhone® data plan:
stay focused on the road. Use your  Phone
Uconnect Touchscreen display, the  Music
vehicle's knobs and controls, and your  Messages
voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music®, Maps,  Maps
Messages, and more.
MULTIMEDIA 155
Phone Maps Apple CarPlay® Voice Command

With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold the VR Push and hold the VR button on the steering NOTE:
button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri wheel until the beep or tap the Microphone Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
voice recognition session. You can also press icon to ask Apple® Siri to take you to a desired phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay® features may not be
and hold the Home button within Apple destination by voice. You can also touch the available in every region and/or language.
CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you to make Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access Apple®
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to interact
calls or listen to voicemail as you normally would using Siri Maps.
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
on your iPhone®. If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the built-in and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
NOTE: Uconnect Navigation system (if equipped) will launch iPhone® and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering instead of Apple CarPlay® Apple® Maps. touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of
wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR session, not a Siri NOTE: the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
session, and it will not function with Apple CarPlay®. A pop-up also appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if an cable, and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that
replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin
Music Apple CarPlay® navigation is currently in use and you
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button on the
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your
attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect route. Selecting
steering wheel, or press and hold the Home button within
5
“Yes” switches the navigation type to the newly used
artists, playlists, and music from iTunes® or method of navigation and a route is planned for the new Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural
any third party application installed on your destination. If “No” is selected, the navigation type voice commands to use a list of your iPhone® features:
device. Using your iPhone® data plan, you can remains unchanged.  Phone
also use select third party audio apps including music,
 Music
news, sports, podcasts, and more. Apps
 Messages
Messages The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible apps that are  Maps — If Equipped
available to use, every time it is launched. You must have
Push and hold the VR button on the steering  Additional Apps — If Equipped
the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed
wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition in to the app through your mobile device for it to work with NOTE:
session. Apple CarPlay® allows you to use Siri Apple CarPlay®. Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is
to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered in the US and other
read incoming text messages, but drivers will not be able Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (US) or
countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements
to read messages, as everything is done via voice. https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Canada) to see
apply.
the latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
156 MULTIMEDIA
ANDROID AUTO™ AND A PPLE Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay® can also be activated/
deactivated on specific devices.
C ARPLAY® T IPS AND T RICKS 1. In “Smartphone Projection Manager”, select the
Smartphone Device Mirroring — If Equipped name of the device you would like to activate/
deactivate Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay®.
Once downloaded or activated, Android Auto™ and Apple
CarPlay® will automatically start when your smartphone is 2. The setting, “Enable Android Auto™” or “Enable Apple
plugged into a USB port. This function can be activated/ CarPlay®”, will display depending on your
deactivated through the Smartphone Projection Manager. smartphone. Press the check box to deactivate these
features. To reactivate Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay®, press the check box until a check mark
appears.
Smartphone Device Mirroring

To activate/deactivate this feature, connect your
smartphone with the manufacturer’s USB cable to the
vehicle’s USB ports.
1. Press the Phone/Bluetooth® button in the Settings
menu, or press the Apps button.
2. Press “Smartphone Projection Manager”.
3. The setting, “Smartphone Device Mirroring”, will
Smartphone Projection Manager display with a check mark. To deactivate Android
Auto™ and Apple CarPlay® for all devices, press the
check box. To reactivate Android Auto™ and Apple
CarPlay® for all devices, press the check box again Enable Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto™
until a check mark appears.
MULTIMEDIA 157
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic Bluetooth®

Pairing
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED  Press “Work” to navigate to a preset work address. If
not already set, the system will prompt you to add a
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® for (UCONNECT 4C NAV ONLY) work address.
 Press “Information” to view Traffic, Where Am I?, and
the first time and undergoing the setup procedure, the
smartphone pairs to the Uconnect system via Bluetooth® OPERATING N AVIGATION Country Info.
without any setup required every time it is within range, if  Press “Emergency” to search for Hospitals, and Police
Bluetooth® is turned on. and Fire Stations near your current location. You can
also display your current location and save any Emer-
NOTE:
gency facility location to your Favorites.
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while Android
 Press the search bar at the top of the screen to search
Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth® connections to
for a specific address to route to.
function. The connected device is unavailable to other
devices when connected using Android Auto™ or Apple  Press “Route Options” and select from a list of options
CarPlay®. to alter your route such as “Expressways”, “Toll Roads”,
“Ferries”, “Carpool Lanes”, and more.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect System —
If Equipped NOTE: 5
During route guidance, at any time you can return to the
It is possible to have multiple devices connected to the Navigation Main Menu by selecting Menu.
Uconnect system. For example, if using Android Auto™/
Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
place hands-free phone calls or send hands-free text
messages. However, another device can also be paired to Navigation Icon
the Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, To access the Navigation system, press the Nav button on
so the passenger can stream music. the touchscreen.
NOTE:  Press “Where To?” to find or route to a destination.
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be launched  Press “View Map” to view the map.
from the front and center console USB ports.
 Press “Home” to navigate to a preset home address. If
not already set, the system will prompt you to add a
home address.
158 MULTIMEDIA
WHERE T O?
Where To? — Main Menu
Where To? Button

From the Nav Main Menu, press the Where To? button and select one of the following methods to program a route guidance.
NOTE:
Refer to the individual section of the chosen option for further information.
Search All Press this button to search all “Where To?” categories for a location.
Address Press this button to search by a street address or a street name with house number.
Recent Press this button to access previously routed addresses or locations.

MULTIMEDIA 159
Favorites Press this button to access previously saved addresses or locations.
Press this button when you want to route to a point of interest. The POI database
POI (Point of Interest) allows you to select a destination from a list of locations and public places, or points
of interest.
Trips Press this button to program a new trip or recall a saved trip.
Intersection Press this button to enter in two street names as a destination.

5
Press this button to select a destination directly from the Map screen. By selecting a
Point on Map street segment or icon, you can quickly enter a destination without the need to input
the city name or street.
Home Press this button to program or confirm a route to the saved home address.
Work Press this button to program or confirm a route to the saved work address.
Press this button to route to a particular city. The Navigation system will calculate a
City Center
route with the destination at the center of the city.
Press this button to route to a nearby city. The screen will display an alphabetical
Closest Cities listing of nearby cities. The Navigation system will calculate a route with the
destination at the center of the nearby city.
160 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Number Press this button to route to a location or point of interest by the phone number.
Press this button to route to a Geo-Coordinate. A Geo-Coordinate is a coordinate

Geo-Coordinates used in geography. You can determine a Geo-Coordinate with the help of a handheld
GPS receiver, a map, or the Navigation system.
Press the Trails button and select the option to start trail recording to track the route
Trails you are driving. Select the option to “stop trail recording” to end tracking. This gives
you a point of reference for a particular route if needed.
Press this button and select which “Where To?” categories you would like to appear
Edit Where To
in the “Where To?” menu, and which ones you don’t.
Where To? — Search All, Address, Recent, 3. Select the desired location from the list of locations
that appears. Once the correct location has been
And Favorite Destinations selected, you will be asked to confirm your route by
pressing “Route To”.
SEARCH ALL
4. Press the GO! button on the touchscreen to begin
1. Press the Search All button. your route.
2. Enter the location name, street address, city, etc., you
wish to search for, to search all “Where To?”
categories for the entered location, and press “OK”.
Search
MULTIMEDIA 161
ADDRESS
1. Press the Address button.
2. Press “Spell City” or “Spell Street” to begin entering
the address of your destination.
Select Street Gear Icon

5
To change the state and/or country, press the state To delete a destination from the list, press “Delete” in
and/or country button and follow the prompts to that pop-up menu.
change the state and/or country.
Once the correct city, street and number have been
Enter Address entered, you will be asked to confirm your route by
pressing “Route To”.
If you press “Spell City”, you will have to enter and se-
3. Press the GO! button to confirm your destination and
lect/press the desired city name, followed by the de-
begin your route.
sired street name, and then the house number.
If you press “Spell Street”, you will have to enter and RECENT
select/press the desired street name in the correct
city, and then you will have to enter the house num- 1. Press the Recent button.
ber. 2. Press the button with the name of the desired
destination.
To display the options for a destination from the list,
press the Gear icon, which opens a pop-up menu with
the options for that destination. Manage Destinations
162 MULTIMEDIA
The following options are available for each destina- FAVORITE DESTINATIONS Where To? — Point of Interest
tion:
1. Press the Favorites button. To enter a destination by Point of Interest (POI), press the
 Edit Name Where To? button from the Nav Main Menu, then press
2. To save a favorite destination, press the Add Favorite
 Phone Number button and follow the steps to route a destination. the POI Categories button.
 Move Up 3. To delete a destination from the list, press the Gear
 Move Down icon next to the destination and select “Delete” in the
 Place Pin (saves the spot on the list) pop-up menu on the touchscreen.
 Delete 4. Press the button with the name of the desired favorite
destination and confirm the route with “Route To”.
3. Select “Route To” to confirm your route. Press “GO!” to confirm the destination, and start the
4. Press “GO!” to confirm your destination, and begin route guidance.
your route. 5. To display the options for a favorite destination, press
If you are currently on a route guidance and you select the Options icon that looks like a gear.
“Recent”, the system will ask you to choose one of the The following options are available for each favorite
following: destination:
 “Cancel Previous Route”  Edit Name
 “Add to Current Route”  Phone Number POI Categories Button
Within “Add to Current Route”, you can add the  Move Up
destination to your current route or set it as the final The Point of Interest database allows you to select a
destination.  Move Down destination from a list of locations and public places, or
 Delete points of interest.
NOTE:
You can press the Back Arrow button to return to the
previous screen or the X button to exit.
MULTIMEDIA 163
You have the following POIs to choose from: 3. Press the GO! button to confirm the destination and
begin the route.
Search By Name POI — POI CATEGORIES

1. Press the POI Categories button.
You can search through the available POI categories
POI Categories to find your desired POI.
The available categories are:
 List All POIs
Restaurant  Airport
 ATM or Banking
 Automotive
Search Area
Hotel/Motel  Coffee Shops 5
You will have the following options to change your search
area:  Community
 Around Here  Entertainment
Gas Station  In [...] (In a City or a Zip Code)  Gas Stations
 Along Route (only available during route guidance)  Highway Exit
 Around Destination (only available during route guid-
 Hospital
ance)
Rest Area  Hotels or Motels
 Around Next Waypoint
 Local Services
POI — SEARCH BY NAME  Medical
ATM/Bank 1. Press the Search by Name button.  Parking
A keyboard will appear on the screen. Type in the POI  Parks and Recreation
that you want to search and press the OK button to
display available items.  Restaurants
You can also change your POI search area by pressing any
of the category buttons and pressing the Along Route 2. Press the desired POI and press “Route To” to  Shopping
button to access the Search Area option. confirm the route.  Travel and Transportation
 Truck
164 MULTIMEDIA
2. Select a category and then select a subcategory if POI — RESTAURANT, HOTEL/MOTEL, GAS Where To? — Trips
necessary. Press the ABC button to activate a STATIONS, REST AREA, AND ATM/BANKING
keyboard to search within the POI categories. 1. Press the Trips button
1. Press the corresponding button for the POI category 2. To add a Trip, follow these steps:
you would like to navigate to.
a. Press the Create New Trip button.
You can search for a POI by the following categories, b. Press the Destination button, and then press “Pick
which are button tabs at the top of the screen: Destination”.
 Name c. Press “Add Destination” or “Insert Final Destina-
 Distance tion” to add waypoints and destinations to your
trip.
 ABC (Search)
d. Choose from the following options to add a desti-
nation:
• Address
• Recent
• Point of Interest
• Favorites
• Home
ABC Keyboard
• Intersection
3. Press the desired POI and press “Route To” to • Geo-Coordinates
confirm the route. • Point on Map
4. Press the GO! button to confirm the destination and • City Center
begin the route. • Closest Cities
• Phone Number
NOTE:
POIs Around Here Refer to the individual section of the chosen option for
further information.
2. Press the desired POI destination and press “Route
To” to confirm the route. e. To save your Trip, you must press “Calculate
Route” and press “Save”.
3. Press the GO! button to confirm the destination and
f. Your new Trip will appear on the Trips list.
begin the route.
MULTIMEDIA 165
3. To route to a saved Trip, follow these steps: NOTE:

a. Press the button with the name of the desired Trip If the system automatically recognizes the city, or street, it
and press the first destination in the list. will populate a list of recognized cities or streets. If not,
press the List button to select from the available options.
b. Confirm the route by pressing “Route To”, and
then press “GO!” to confirm the destination and to
start the route guidance.
4. To delete a Trip from the list, press the Gear icon and
then select “Delete” from the pop-up menu.
5. To display the options for a trip, press the Gear icon.
6. The following Options are available for each trip:
 Edit Name
 Move Up Point On Map
 Move Down 5
3. To enter a destination by Point On Map, follow these
 Delete steps:
Where To? — Point on Map And  Once your cross is where you want it, press “Route
To”, or select “Places Nearby” to select a nearby Select Street
Intersection destination. Then press “GO!” to confirm the desti-
nation and begin route guidance. 3. If “Spell Street” was selected, you must select the
POINT ON MAP correct street. You will then be asked to spell the
INTERSECTION intersecting street, and then the desired city.
1. Press the Point On Map button.
4. Press the Route To button to confirm your route, and
2. Use the touchscreen to drag over to the desired 1. Press the Intersection button.
then press “GO!” to confirm the destination and begin
destination, and press the touchscreen to select a 2. Press the Spell City, Spell Street, or Select Country your route.
location. button to enter the desired city, street name, or
country.
166 MULTIMEDIA
Where To? — Home And Work NOTE: Where To? — City Center And Closest Cities
A confirmation screen will appear asking, “Are you sure
HOME you want to reset this location?”. Press “Reset” to confirm CITY CENTER
the deletion and then set a new Home location by
1. Press the Home button. If there is no Home Address following the previous instructions. 1. Press the City Center button.
entered, press “Yes” to enter it now. 2. To enter a destination by City Center, follow these
2. To enter your Home Address, choose one of the WORK steps:
following options: 1. Press the Work button. If there is no Work Address a. Enter the name of the City you would like to route
 Spell City entered, press “Yes” to enter it now. to.
 Spell Street 2. To set your Work Address, choose one of the following
 Select Country options:
NOTE:  Spell City

Refer to the individual section of the chosen option for  Spell Street
further information.  Select Country
Once you have generated your Home Address, you NOTE:
will be asked to Save it. Refer to the individual section of the chosen option for
a. Press the Save Home button to confirm your desti- further information.
nation and begin the route to your Home Address.
3. Once you have generated your Work Address, you will
b. This address will be saved as your Home Address,
be asked to Save it.
and it can be accessed by pressing the Home
button in the Where To? Menu. 4. Press the Save Work button to confirm your
destination and begin the route to your Work Address.
3. To delete a saved Home location (or other saved Select City Or Zip Code
locations), so you can save a new Home location, 5. This address will be saved as your Work Address, and
follow these steps: it can be accessed by pressing the Work button in the b. Press the desired city from the list.
Where To? Menu. c. Press the Route To button to confirm your route,
a. Press the Nav button, and in the “Where To”
screen, press “Edit Where To”. and then press “GO!” to confirm your destination
and begin your route.
b. Press the Home button.
c. Under the Manage screen, press the Reset Loca-
tion button.
MULTIMEDIA 167
CLOSEST CITIES GEO-COORDINATES TRAILS

1. Press the Closest Cities button. 1. Press the Geo-Coordinates button. 1. Press the Trails button.
2. Press the desired city from the list. 2. Enter the Latitude by typing in the numbers. Use the 2. Press “Start Recording”.
3. Press the Route To button to confirm your route, and dial pad to select specific numbers in the location
then press “GO!” to confirm your destination and shown.
begin your route.
Where To? — Phone, Geo-Coordinates, And

Trails
PHONE
1. Press the Phone Number button.
2. To enter a destination by Phone Number, follow these 5
steps:
a. Enter the Phone Number of the business you
would like to route to.
b. Press the desired destination from the list. Start Recording Trails
c. Press the Route To button to confirm your route, 3. When you want to end the recording of a route, press
and then press “GO!” to confirm your destination Geo-Coordinates
the Record button, and press “Yes” to confirm.
and begin your route. 3. Press the OK button. The trip you recorded will be added to the Recent
4. Enter the Longitude by typing in the numbers. Use the Trails list.
dial pad to select specific numbers in the location
shown. Before Route Guidance
5. Press “OK” to confirm the destination. Before confirming the destination with the GO! button, it is
possible to select options different from the standard
6. Press the Route To button to confirm your route, and route settings.
then press “GO!” to confirm your destination and
begin your route.  Route Options — Press the Route Options button to
display a list of options to alter your route. To make a
selection, press and release the desired setting.
168 MULTIMEDIA
4 — Ferries Allowed
5 — Carpool Lanes Allowed
6 — Car Shuttle Trains Allowed
 Avoid — Press the Avoid button to choose road types to

avoid during your route. To make a selection press and
release the desired setting.
Route Options Button Detour Types

NOTE:
Since toll roads, tunnels and ferries are built for the
purpose of shortening travel distances, avoiding these
road types may increase distance and travel time.
 Accept — Press the Accept button to confirm desired
detoured route.
 Save — Press the Save button to save the destination
Avoid Button as a Trip.
Press the GO! button to confirm your destination and to
start your route guidance.
Route Options
1 — Round Trip
2 — Expressways Allowed
3 — Toll Roads Allowed
MULTIMEDIA 169
VIEW MAP Time of Arrival/Time to Destination/Distance (only during  Stop Guidance

route guidance) Press this button to stop route guidance.
View Map — Main Menu Press the button in the upper right area of the screen to  Settings
Press the View Map button from the Nav Main Menu to the display items available. Press the desired option Press this button to view all the available settings
display a map of your current position. button: Ú page 169.
 Time of Arrival View Map — Settings
 Time to Destination
With the Map displayed, press the button on the bottom
 Distance right of the map that has three horizontal lines on it, then
Turn List (only during route guidance) press the Settings button.
Press the area in the upper center part of the screen that
displays your next turn to see a Turn List for your current
route.
Press a turn in the displayed Turn List for the following
options: 5
 Show on Map
 Avoid Street
Options (only during route guidance)
View Map Button Press the Options button to display the following options.
Press the desired button:
With the map displayed you have the following features
available:  2D North Up/Map View 2D/Map View 3D
Press this button to scroll between the three viewing
Menu
options. View Map Settings Icon
Press this button to return to the Nav Main Menu.  Repeat Directions
Zoom In +/Zoom Out - Press this button to repeat the current voice prompt.
Press the Zoom In (+) or Zoom Out (-) buttons to change  Mute Guidance
the zoom level. Roads with lower functional classification Press this button to mute the voice prompts.
are not shown in higher zoom levels (e.g., residential
streets, lightly-traveled county roads).
170 MULTIMEDIA
 Map Setup — Press this button to display items to SETTINGS — MAP SETUP
customize how your map is viewed Ú page 170.
With the Map displayed, press the button in the bottom
 Speed Limit — Press this button to turn on/off speed right corner of the map that has three horizontal bars on
limit warning announcements and to enter a it, then press the Settings button and then the Map Setup
predefined speed limit for your route. button.
 Guidance — Press this button to display items to
customize your route guidance Ú page 173.
 Traffic — Press this button to set how you receive traffic
information updates.
 GPS (DMS) — Press this button to change the GPS
display. Press the desired button:
 Decimal
 Degrees-Minutes-Seconds (DMS)
View Map Settings Button
 Degrees-Minutes (DM)
The following Map Settings are available:
 Map Updates — Press the button to view map updates
for the Navigation system.
 About — Press the button to view information about the
Navigation system.
Map Setup
Map Settings
MULTIMEDIA 171
The following Map Setup options are available:
5
Map Setup Options
Press this button to change how the Map View is displayed. Press the desired button:
 3D (Must Select 3D City Models Or 3D Landmarks For 3D Map View To Display)
Map View
 2D
 2D North Up
Map Appearance Press this button to select different themes for your map.
Press this button to turn on/off the current street display on the lower center of the Map
Display Current Street View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has
been selected.
Press this button to turn on/off the current city display in the lower right of the Map View.
Display Current City Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been
selected.
Press this button to change the Destination Information that is displayed in the upper
right corner of the Map View. Press the desired button:
Destination Information  Time of Arrival
 Time to Destination
 Distance
172 MULTIMEDIA
Press this button to change how the Auto Zoom feature adjusts the zoom level during
guidance in Map View. Press the desired button:
 Far
Auto Zoom
 Medium
 Low
 Off
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display the available Point of Interest
POI Visibility icons you would like displayed while in Map View. Press and release the desired selection
until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Press the 3D Landmarks within the Map Setup screen to display 3D Landmarks while in
3D Landmarks Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting
has been selected.
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display the area’s terrain while in Map
Digital Terrain Model View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has
been selected.
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display Park Areas while in Map View.
Park Areas Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been
selected.
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display Railroad Tracks while in Map
Railroads View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has
been selected.
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display City Areas while in Map View.
City Areas Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been
selected.
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display River Names while in Map View.
River Names Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been
selected.
MULTIMEDIA 173
SETTINGS — GUIDANCE
With the Map displayed, press the Options button, then press the Settings button and then the Guidance button. You can also access this menu by pressing the Settings button in the
lower right of the Nav Main Menu.
Guidance Button
The following Guidance options are available:
Press this button to enable Voice Guidance prompts during route guidance. Press and
Play Voice Guidance
release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Nav Guidance Volume Press the + or - buttons to adjust the Nav Guidance Volume.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Press this button to enable Lane Recommendation during route guidance. Press and
Lane Recommendation
release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Press this button to enable Junction View during route guidance. Press and release the
Junction View
button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
174 MULTIMEDIA
Press this button to display the Signposts types you would like displayed while in route
Signposts guidance. Press and release the desired selection button until a check mark appears,
showing the setting has been selected.
Press this button to display the Route Progress Bar while in route guidance. Press and
Route Progress Bar release the selection button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been
selected.
Press this button to determine which road types are OK to travel on while in route
Route Options guidance. Press and release the desired selection button until a check mark appears,
showing the setting has been selected.
Press this button to activate Highway Mode. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Highway Mode
Having this setting on will allow you to select the setting “Highway Services”.
Press this button to display the available Offered Services types you would like displayed
while in route guidance. Press and release the desired selection button until a check
Offered Services
mark appears, showing the setting has been selected. Available selections are “Gas
Stations”, “Restaurants”, “Rest Area”, and “Auto Services And Maintenance”.
MULTIMEDIA 175
I NFORMATION
5
Information Button
From the Nav Main Menu, press the Information button and select one of the following options to view additional information:
Traffic “Traffic” displays detailed traffic information.
“Where Am I?” displays the address and Geo-Coordinates of your current location.
Where Am I? 1. Press the Show GPS Info button to view the GPS information.
2. Press the Save button to save the location in your Favorites.
Select the desired country on the touchscreen. Information, such as average speed
Country Info limits and specific phone number country codes, will be provided about the selected
country.
176 MULTIMEDIA
EMERGENCY  Select the desired Hospital, Police Department, or Fire

Department and press “Route To” to confirm your
From the Nav Main Menu, press the Emergency button route, and then press “GO!” to confirm the destination
and press one of the following options to search and route and begin route guidance.
to a specific location.
MAP U PDATES
The map data available in your vehicle is the most
up-to-date information that was available when your
vehicle was built. Map data is updated periodically as map
information changes. Follow these steps if you wish to
obtain an update for your vehicle:
1. Please visit chryslergroup.navigation.com to obtain
your map update. At the top of the page, click the
Emergency Nearby Options brand of your vehicle. Then, at the drop down menu,
1 — Hospital select your vehicle model and its model year. You
will then be directed to a page that will let you know
2 — Police
if your vehicle needs a map update or not.
3 — Fire Department
2. Or, visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or DriveUconnect.ca
Emergency Button (Canada) and follow these steps:
Press the “Where Am I?” button to display your exact
 Under the “Help & Support” tab, select your
current location.
vehicle brand, model, and year. Then, click
Press the Save button to save your current location in “SYSTEM UPDATES.” Simply follow the steps and
Favorites. place your order.
You can search for a Hospital, Police Department, or Fire 3. Or, if you wish, you can also visit your dealer or place
Department by the following categories, which are button a phone call to request your Map Update. US/CAN
tabs at the top of the screen: General Consumer Support:
 Name 888-628-6277
 Distance FCA US LLC Dealer Garmin Support:
 ABC (Search) 877-628-4480
NOTE: FCA US LLC Consumer FreshMaps:
In case of emergency, please contact the facility to verify 866-422-8171
their availability before proceeding.
MULTIMEDIA 177
SIRIUSXM® TRAVEL LINK SiriusXM® Travel Link feature is seamlessly integrated Avoid traffic before you reach it. By enhancing your
into your vehicle, so you can stay in the know while you’re vehicle's Navigation system with the ability to see detailed
on the road. A few minutes after you start your vehicle, traffic information, you can pinpoint traffic incidents,
Travel Link information arrives and updates in the determine average traffic speed and estimate travel time
background. You can access the information whenever along your route. Since the service is integrated with a
you like, with no waiting. vehicle's Navigation system, SiriusXM® Traffic Plus can
 To access SiriusXM® Travel Link, press the Apps help drivers pick the fastest route based on traffic
button on the touchscreen, then the SiriusXM® Travel conditions.
Link button. 1. Detailed information on traffic speed, accidents,
NOTE: construction, and road closings.
SiriusXM® Travel Link requires a subscription, sold sepa- 2. Traffic information from multiple sources, including
rately after the trial subscription included with your vehicle police and emergency services, cameras and road
purchase. sensors.
SIRIUSXM® TRAFFIC P LUS 3. Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information.

5
4. View conditions for points along your route and
SiriusXM® Travel Link beyond.
In addition to delivering over 160 channels of the best
sports, entertainment, talk, and commercial-free music,
SiriusXM® offers premium data services that work in
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
conjunction with compatible navigation systems. IF EQUIPPED
SiriusXM® Travel Link brings a wealth of useful
information into your vehicle and right to your fingertips. I S M Y VEHICLE CONNECTED?
 Weather — Check variety of local and national weather
If equipped, vehicles with an ASSIST and an SOS button
information from radar maps to current and five day
are connected vehicles. These buttons will be located on
forecast.
either the rearview mirror or overhead console, depending
 Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel prices in your
on the vehicle. If these buttons are present in your vehicle,
area and route to the station of your choice.
you have a connected radio and can take advantage of the
 Sports Scores — In-game and final scores plus weekly many connected vehicle features.
schedules of your favorite sports team. SiriusXM® Traffic Plus
For further information about the ASSIST and SOS buttons
 Movie Listings — Check local movie theaters and list-
ings in your area and route to the theater of your
Ú page 233.
choice.
178 MULTIMEDIA
I NTRODUCTION TO C ONNECTED V EHICLE Guardian™ Customer Care center via wireless and  If equipped — Send & Go capability with the Vehicle
landline communications networks. Depending on the Branded App. Use the Vehicle Branded App to easily
SERVICES type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM Guardian™ search, map and send your locations directly to your
connected services require an operable LTE (voice/data) Uconnect Navigation.
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s Uconnect
or 4G (data) network compatible with your device.  The ability to locate your vehicle, when you forget
system is that you can now take advantage of SiriusXM
SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on equipped where you parked, using the Vehicle Finder function of
Guardian™ connected services. To unlock the full
vehicles purchased within the continental United States, the Vehicle Branded App.
potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first
Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Canada. Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use
need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
NOTE: Uconnect system and SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
WARNING! services.
 Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
dependent upon an operative telematics device, a The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your Rearview Mirror
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
cellular connection, navigation map data, and GPS Or Overhead Console
Your complete attention is always required while driving
to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only use and satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to If equipped, the ASSIST Button is used for contacting
interact with the features and applications when it is reach the response center or reach emergency Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, and
safe to do so. Failure to follow these warnings can support. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. The SOS Call button
result in a collision and death or serious personal  Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available connects you directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
injury. everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or Care for assistance in an emergency.
enclosed areas.
 Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM Activation — If Equipped
NOTE: Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service delivery To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, transmission are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels, weather, vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian™
and use of data from your vehicle Ú page 192. damage to the electrical system or other important connected services.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information parts of your vehicle, network congestion, civil distur- 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
bances, actions of third parties or the government, touchscreen.
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care Internet failure, and/or the physical location of your
vehicle, such as in an underground parking structure or 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
 US residents visit: https://www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian.html or call 1-844-796-4827 under a bridge. 3. For customers in the United States, select “Customer
 Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveucon- Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available for all Care” to speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call 1-877-324-9091 models. Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle,
or select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™? SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
For customers in Canada, enter your email address to
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in the  The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote start
activate services in your vehicle.
Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, which receives your vehicle from virtually anywhere by using the
GPS signals and communicates with the SiriusXM Vehicle Branded App or your computer.
MULTIMEDIA 179
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles  Once on the Remote screen and you have set up your
four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote Door Lock/
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial* period Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn
for use of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services and lights remotely, if equipped.
starting on the date of vehicle purchase. To get started
 Press the Location button on the bottom menu bar of
with your trial, enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
required.
a location to your Mobile Navigation, if equipped.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.  Press the Settings side menu in the upper left corner of
Features And Packages the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist
Call Centers.
After the trial period, you must purchase a subscription to
continue your services by calling a SiriusXM Guardian™ Using Your Owner’s Site
 For customers in the United States, if your vehicle is not
Customer Care agent. registered at the dealership, you will have to call the Your Owner’s Site website https://www.mopar.com/
en-us.html (US Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian
GETTING S TARTED WITH CONNECTED Customer Care call center from inside your vehicle or
Residents) provides you with all the information you need,
press the in-vehicle registration button. From there, 5
V EHICLE SERVICES you will be able to register your vehicle and add your all in one place. You can track your service history, find
vehicle’s VIN to your account. recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch videos
Download The Vehicle Branded App  For customers in Canada, register your account via about your vehicle's features, and easily access your
your vehicle. manuals. It is also where you can manage your SiriusXM
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu bar. Guardian™ account. This section will familiarize you with
the key elements of the website that will help you get the
b. Press the Activate Services button from the apps
most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confirmation For customers in the United States, press the Sign In/
email will be sent to the provided email address. Register button and enter your email address and
Once you have activated your services, you’re only a few
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confirmation password.
steps away from using connected services.
email. It may take a short time before remote For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle button.
 Download the Vehicle Branded App to your mobile
services will be available, but you will be able to Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health Report”, and
device.
log into the Vehicle Branded App and the Owner’s “Recalls”. The website will then prompt you to log in using
 Use your Owner Account login and password to open
Site. your email address and password.
the app and then set up a PIN.
180 MULTIMEDIA
 Edit/Edit Profile: USING S IRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ NOTE:

To manage the details of your SiriusXM Guardian™ Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
account, such as your contact information, password SOS Call — If Equipped dependent on an operational Uconnect system, cellular
and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit network availability that is compatible with the device in
Profile button to access the details of your account. WARNING! your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all features
 Connected Services Status: of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at all
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services, including times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call, will NOT work with-
Guardian™-equipped vehicle. How It Works
out a network connection compatible with your device.
 Remote Commands: 1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light will turn
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™ green indicating a call has been placed.
subscription, press one of these icons and enter your Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A Button
four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely
NOTE:
start (if equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the horn Center Light Status Description  In case the SOS Call button is accidentally pushed,
and flash the lights. Off No call activated there is a 10-second delay before the SOS call is
Editing Your Notifications placed. The system will verbally alert you that a call
Green Active call in progress is about to be made. To cancel the SOS Call connec-
Notifications are an important element of your SiriusXM tion, push the SOS Call button on the rearview
Red System error
Guardian™ account. For example, any time you use your mirror or overhead console or press the Cancel
remote services (such as Remote Door Unlock), you can button on the touchscreen within 10 seconds.
elect to receive a text message, push notification, and/or SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features
E-mail to notify you of the event. To set up the  During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired phone
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard is disconnected so incoming or outgoing calls will
notifications, please follow these instructions. assistance features located on the rearview mirror or go through your mobile device versus the
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at https:// overhead console designed to enhance your driving hands-free system which is not available due to
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents) and experience if you should ever need assistance or support. the SOS Call.
select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca (Canadian Description
Residents), select “My Vehicle” and then 2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
“Dashboard”. SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is made,
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent in the event of the agent will stay on the line with you.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button. an emergency. When the connection between the vehicle NOTE:
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™” where you and the live agent is made, your vehicle will automatically
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the SiriusXM
can edit Notification Preferences. transmit location information. In the event of a minor
Guardian™ Customer Care center may be recorded or
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email address collision, medical or any other emergency, press the SOS
monitored for quality assurance purposes. Through your
to notify you, and you can customize the types of button to be connected to a call center agent who can
enrollment in and use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
messages. send emergency assistance to your vehicle’s location.
connected services, you consent to being recorded.
MULTIMEDIA 181
SOS Call System Limitations  Network congestion.

 Weather conditions. WARNING!
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and that
travel into Mexico and Canada may have limited services.  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.  Do not add any aftermarket electrical equipment to
In particular, responses to SOS calls or other emergency If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your
services may be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles (including during or after an accident), the SOS Call vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emer-
purchased outside the United States and Canada are system, among other vehicle systems, will not operate. gency call. To avoid interference that can cause the
unable to receive SiriusXM Guardian™ connected SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equip-
Requirements
services. ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
 This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the US recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
or Canada. modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON
detected:
Guardian™ connected services. Vehicle must be regis- (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT),
 The light will continuously be illuminated red. tered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an active NEITHER THE VEHICLE BRANDED APPS NOR THE
 The screen will display the following message “Vehicle subscription that includes the applicable feature. SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ CONNECTED SERVICES WILL
phone requires service. Please contact your dealer.”  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G OPERATE. 5
 An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle phone (data) network connection compatible with your device.
 The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”  Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC (Acces- Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors sory) position with a properly functioning electrical malfunction in any part of the air bag system is
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop SOS Call system. detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated,
system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the air bag system may not be working properly and
the following factors: WARNING!
the SOS Call system may not be able to send a signal
 The ignition key is in OFF position.  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center. If
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact. (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
 The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon- could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately.
nected during a vehicle crash. signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
 Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean you
 The SOS Call system software and/or hardware is placing an emergency call.
will not have SOS Call services if needed. If the Rear-
damaged during a vehicle crash. (Continued) view Mirror Light is illuminated, have an authorized
 LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) coverage and/or GPS dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
signals are unavailable or obstructed. (Continued)
182 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Press this button to unlock

WARNING! Unlock
 Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the case of your vehicle.
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire an emergency. Press this button to cancel
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or  On your behalf, agents are able to notify family Cancel Vehicle Start
remote start.
location), do not wait for voice contact from a members about the collision.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent. All occu-  Agents can brief first responders of the situation before
pants should exit the vehicle immediately and move they arrive on scene. Remote Commands lets you send a request to your
to a safe location. vehicle in one of three ways:
 In the event vehicle occupants are unable to speak,
 Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and emergency services will be dispatched based on the  Anywhere using your mobile device and Vehicle
regular inspection of your vehicle may result in last known GPS coordinates. Branded App
vehicle damage, accident or injury.  SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are depen-  From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not available
dent upon an operative telematics device, a cellular on all functions)
connection, navigation map data, and GPS satellite  Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (not
Automatic SOS — If Equipped reception, which can limit the ability to reach the available on all functions)
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can response center or reach emergency support. Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile Device
immediately connect you with help in the event that your  Terms of service of the Uconnect and the SiriusXM And The Vehicle Branded App
vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an accident, a live agent will Guardian™ subscriber agreement apply. See terms of
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on your
contact you through the Uconnect system and alert services for complete service limitation.
mobile device.
emergency services.
Remote Commands 2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your SiriusXM
NOTE:
On the Remote Commands screen, you have access to Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit
An active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is required for
several vehicle features that can be controlled remotely code established when you activated your SiriusXM
this feature to function.
from your mobile device. These features include locking/ Guardian™ connected services). Enter the SiriusXM
After a crash where the airbags deploy: unlocking, remote starting, and activating the horn and Guardian™ Security PIN on the keypad.
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an agent. lights of the vehicle. 3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the command to
2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the location Press this button to lock go through to your vehicle.
of the emergency. Lock
your vehicle. 4. A message will let you know if the command was
3. If needed, the agent will request the assistance of received by your vehicle.
Press this button to start
emergency services. Vehicle Start
your vehicle.
4. First responders will arrive on scene. The agent will Press this button to sound
remain on the call until emergency services arrive. Horn & Lights the horn and activate your
lights.
MULTIMEDIA 183
Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s Site NOTE:  Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not be
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the username and Anyone with access to your PIN may request Remote Door processed if the vehicle is in motion, the ignition key is
password you used when activating your SiriusXM Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility to protect your PIN on or during an emergency call.
Guardian™ connected services in your vehicle. appropriately. NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed via your
NOTE: Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Owner’s Site or through the Vehicle Branded App on your
If you forgot your username or password, links are Description compatible device.
provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides you the Remote Vehicle Start
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered into your ability to lock or unlock the door on your vehicle without
Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you want to send the the keys and from virtually any distance. Description
command to by clicking on its image along the top.
Working Vehicle Conditions The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with the
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote commands. ability to start the engine on your vehicle without the keys
Press the desired icon to activate that feature.  The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill. and from virtually any distance. Once started, the preset
 The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower climate controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool down
4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit
reception. the interior. 5
code established when you activated your SiriusXM  Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
You can also send a command to turn off an engine that
Guardian™ connected services). Please enter your connection.
has been started using Remote Vehicle Start. After
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN. Requirements 15 minutes, if you have not entered your vehicle with the
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you know  Vehicle must be properly equipped with SiriusXM key, the engine will shut off automatically.
if the command was received by your vehicle. Guardian™. This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G with a factory-installed Remote Start system.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (for
(data) network connection. If using the Vehicle
example, in case of an accidental lock-out): You can set up push notifications every time a command
Branded App to command your vehicle, your device
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care if you is sent to activate or cancel Remote Start.
must be compatible and be connected to an operable
are unable to lock your vehicle through the Vehicle LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection. Working Vehicle Conditions
Branded App or your key fob.  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™  The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an active subscription that includes the appli-  The vehicle has been started with the key fob within the
Customer Care agent will verify your identity by asking cable feature. last 14 days.
for your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.  An ignition cycle is required for some remote  The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and Remote  The vehicle’s security system has been armed and not
PIN, you can ask them to perform a remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote Horn & Lights triggered since the last vehicle start.
command. activation.
 The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
 The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
184 MULTIMEDIA
 The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of fuel, NOTE: overhead console designed to enhance your driving
along with oil and battery power. The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to be loud experience if you should ever need assistance or support.
 The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off. and get noticed. Please keep in mind the surroundings How It Works
 If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic trans- when using this feature. You are responsible for
compliance with local laws, rules and ordinances in the Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and you will
mission.
location of your vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights. be presented with your ASSIST options on the
 The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing the
reception. Assist — If Equipped touchscreen.
 Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
Description Requirements
connection.
 If the Panic button has been pressed, the vehicle must Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™  This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the US
be started at least once after alarming the system. connected services feature may contain an ASSIST button and Canada.
in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM
NOTE:
services have been activated, the ASSIST button can Guardian™ connected services.
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents are not
connect you directly to the Customer Care call center (if  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
authorized for Remote Vehicle Start services. Contact the
equipped). You will be directed to one of the following four (data) network connection.
Uconnect Care Team for assistance.
services:  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
Remote Horn & Lights  Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or need a and have an active subscription that includes the appli-
Description tow, you’ll be connected to someone who can help cable feature.
anytime.  Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC (Acces-
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy
parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may also  Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM sory) position with a properly functioning electrical
help if you need to draw attention to your vehicle for any Guardian™ Customer Care call center to activate your system.
reason. services, renew after your trial has expired, for Disclaimers
in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM Guardian™
If you want, you can set up push notifications every time a connected services, or help answering any general If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your vehicle, you
command is sent to turn on the horn and lights. questions surrounding your connected services. agree to be responsible for any additional roadside
assistance service costs that you may incur. In order to
Working Vehicle Conditions  Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
provide SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services to you,
 The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill. non-connected Uconnect system features, such as
we may record and monitor your conversations with
radio and Bluetooth® connections.
 The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
reception.  Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether such
 Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features — conversations are initiated through the SiriusXM
connection. If Equipped Guardian™ connected services in your vehicle, or via a
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard landline or mobile device, and may share information
assistance features located on the rearview mirror or obtained through such recording and monitoring in
MULTIMEDIA 185
accordance with regulatory requirements. You Requirements your purchase, turn on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect
acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording,  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G your devices.
monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any (data) network connection compatible with your device.  Enables all your passengers to be simultaneously
such call recordings. connected to the web.
 Vehicle must have an active subscription that includes
Send & Go — If Equipped the applicable feature.  Connect several devices at one time.
Description Vehicle Finder  Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or any
other portable-enabled media — can connect over your
The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a Description private in-vehicle network.
destination on your mobile device, and then send the The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the location  A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone on your
route to your vehicle’s Navigation system. of your vehicle. private network access the Web — great for working
How It Works You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to make and relaxing.
1. There are multiple ways to find a destination. After finding your vehicle even easier.
WARNING!
selecting the Location tab at the bottom of the App, How It Works
browse through one of the categories provided, or The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot
type the name or keyword in the search box. You can Select the Vehicle Finder function within the Vehicle while driving the vehicle as doing so may result in an
5
also select categories such as “Favorites” or Branded App and select the Location tab at the bottom of accident involving serious injury or death.
“Contact List”. the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to find your vehicle.
2. Select your destination from the list that appears. Requirements
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
Location information will then be displayed on the  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect
map. How It Works
system.
From this screen, you will be able to:  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides the
(data) network connection compatible with your device. vehicle passengers with an internet access
 View the location on a map. hotspot in the vehicle, using the radio as an
 Vehicle must have an active subscription that includes
 See the distance from your current location. the applicable feature. access point. The hotspot will allow
 Send the destination to the vehicle (Send & Go). Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a laptop or any
 Vehicle ignition must have been turned on within
other portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect Navigation in 14 days.
connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a complimentary
your vehicle. You can also call the destination by 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped 3-month trial period that includes 1GB of total data. The
pressing the Call button. trial can be activated any time within the first year of new
Description
4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through a vehicle ownership.
notification or in the Navigation system. 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that connects
your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
that is ready to go wherever you are. After you've made
186 MULTIMEDIA
Use one of these three ways to purchase a subscription to Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped Requirements
the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect
Description
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the 4G Wi-Fi system.
Hotspot App, and press the How To Purchase button If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
and follow the instructions. Care agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and
(data) network connection compatible with your device.
work with law enforcement to help recover it.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to the  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
AT&T portal to get set up. How It Works and have an active subscription that includes the appli-
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law cable feature.
3. For existing Connected Car customers: Push the
ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T Customer Care enforcement as soon as possible. They will work NOTE:
agent who will assist you. with you to file a stolen vehicle report. Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care that everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can change areas.
your vehicle has been stolen.
its name and the password by selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot
App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent will Monthly Vehicle Health Report —
ask for the stolen vehicle report number (as issued by
also view the connected devices from the app screen by If Equipped
pressing the View Connected Devices button. your local law enforcement). If you have downloaded
the Vehicle Branded App, you can push the Settings Description
NOTE: menu button on your device, select “Help”, and then
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required in order Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect service
select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care” to make through which a summary of the performance of your
to purchase and use 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot. For more infor- the call.
mation on setting up a Wi-Fi connection, visit https:// vehicle’s key systems will be sent to you every month so
myvehicle.att.com. 3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will authenticate you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs.
that you are the owner of the vehicle and contact the This is provided as a convenience to you and does not
law enforcement with whom you filed the stolen substitute for regular maintenance to your vehicle.
WARNING!
vehicle report. In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health Report, the
Always drive safely with your hands on the steering 4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work with Uconnect system in your vehicle may collect and transmit
wheel and obey all applicable laws. You have full your local law enforcement to locate the vehicle. You vehicle data to SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as
responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of will be contacted by law enforcement if your vehicle is your vehicle’s health and performance, your vehicle’s
the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use recovered. While the investigation is ongoing, you location, your utilization of the features in your vehicle,
the features and applications in this vehicle when it is should also contact your insurance company to and other data.
safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in an inform it of the situation.
accident involving in serious injury or death.
MULTIMEDIA 187
This data collection and transmission begins when you In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000 Chrysler
enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue even if you Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my <vehicle name>.”
cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription unless you Description
 “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel level of my
call SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell them to Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind you when <vehicle name>.”
deactivate your connected services. services are needed, or to alert you of other important An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more information, such as recall notices. When you receive a To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for SiriusXM
information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/ notification through your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss
Guardian™ Ú page 178.
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or the message, or press Call Care to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent. Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to Amazon
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
Alexa:
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™ private NOTE:
Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen will 1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your mobile
policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/privacy-policy.
dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle Messages device (Apple® or Android™).
NOTE: mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you can reopen 2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
Your vehicle must be enrolled in an active subscription messages or delete messages.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap Enable.
with connected services. If you have concerns about the
operation, function or performance of your vehicle, please Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped 5
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
take it to an authorized dealer. This report does not Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to command 5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle brand>
replace regularly scheduled maintenance. Check the your vehicle with Amazon Alexa! Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
instrument cluster warning lights and cautions in your
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your vehicle and 6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials. This will
vehicle for the most accurate vehicle health information.
remotely access key services and features. be the same user name and password you used when
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect Navigation, you registering for SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
Description can send a destination directly to your vehicle using Alexa. services. There will be additional settings to confirm
on the following screen.
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa for help,
problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems. For further or complete a list of commands by saying: “Alexa, ask 7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the <vehicle
information, go to your Owner’s website. <brand name> for help with my car.” brand> Skill.
NOTE: Here are a few of the many questions you can ask Alexa: You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill on
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register and  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle Alexa!
activate services. During this process you will be asked to name> with your Voice Code.”
provide an email address to which the reports will be sent.  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle name>
with your Voice Code.”
188 MULTIMEDIA
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped 3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are the ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the
connected through Bluetooth®. touchscreen to activate services.
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and give you
4. The Vehicle Branded App should appear on your
SmartWatch.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS —
peace of mind when your loved ones are out on the road.
You can set boundary limits, monitor driving speed, and Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, you can
IF E QUIPPED
pinpoint your vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use enjoy these features: 1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS Call
the Vehicle Branded App to set alerts:  Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the remote lock button on the mirror or overhead console? You have
 Boundary Alert button in the app and entering your security PIN. 10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call button to
Receive a notification the moment your vehicle is  Remote start or stop your vehicle. cancel the call. To cancel the call, either push the
driven either out of or into a geographic boundary that  View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level, vehicle SOS Call button again, or press the Cancel button on
you set. location, tire pressure warning, and more. the in-vehicle touchscreen.
 Curfew Alert 2. What type of information is sent when I use the SOS
Receive a notification when your car is being driven
MANAGE M Y SIRIUSXM G UARDIAN™ Call button from my vehicle? Certain vehicle
outside of the curfew time. ACCOUNT information, such as make and model, is transmitted
along with the last known GPS location.
 Speed Alert
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account, press the 3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can use
Receive a notification whenever your car exceeds a
ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call SiriusXM Guardian™ the SOS Call button to make a call if you or someone
speed limit you set.
Customer Care. else needs emergency assistance.
 Valet Alert
NOTE:
Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is driven
outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet drop-off zone. It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or turning in CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE D OOR
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™ Care to remove LOCK/UNLOCK FAQ S
your personal data.
Description 1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the door?
SmartWatch Integration puts the Vehicle Branded App CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS Depending on various conditions, it can take up to
three minutes or more for the request to get to your
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get vehicle.
For additional information about SiriusXM Guardian™,
started, follow these steps:
active subscribers can push the ASSIST button (if 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
1. Download the Vehicle Branded App from the App equipped) and then select SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
Store® or Google Play. your in-vehicle touchscreen to contact SiriusXM quickly, however its range is limited and your Vehicle
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using the Guardian™. Your call will be directed to a SiriusXM Branded App comes in handy for these and other
username and password you created when you first Guardian™ agent or held in a queue until an agent is situations.
set up your account. available. If you do not have an active subscription, push
MULTIMEDIA 189
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? People CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & G O 3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them
sometimes lose their mobile devices, which is why on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can
security measures have been engineered into the FAQ S — IF E QUIPPED use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by
Vehicle Branded App. Asking for your username, pushing the red Panic button.
1. How long does it take to send the route and
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are
required for the activation of Remote services
destination to my vehicle? Depending on various CONNECTED S ERVICES S TOLEN V EHICLE
conditions, it can take up to three minutes for the
through your mobile device. It is your responsibility to
request to get through to your vehicle. ASSISTANCE FAQ S — I F EQUIPPED
protect your passwords and PINs.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once 1. Can someone locate my vehicle? To enhance your
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded
you enter your vehicle, and start the engine, the privacy, and the privacy of others using your vehicle,
App? The Vehicle Branded App is compatible with
pop-up message stating that you have a new route a stolen vehicle police report is required for you to
most devices with the Apple® and Android™
will appear. There is an exit button on the pop-up that activate this service. You must involve local law
operating systems. The capabilities of these devices
will cancel the route if selected. enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™ locate
allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the future. 3. Can I select a different route than the most recent your vehicle. We may also locate the vehicle for
other law enforcement or government agencies,
5. Why is the Vehicle Branded App running slow? The
one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter the
subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM
5
vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-up message
Vehicle Branded App relies on a mobile network Guardian™ to do so. We will also provide the service
offers a “Locations” option. Once “Locations” is
connection from your device to send commands to for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you have
selected, you can choose from a list of recently sent
your vehicle which must have an operable LTE (voice/ purchased through them.
destinations.
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network connection. If
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered? After you
either your device or your vehicle is in an area with CONNECTED S ERVICES V EHICLE F INDER provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
below average coverage, it may take longer to log in
and send commands. FAQ S agent with the stolen vehicle report, the agent will
work together with law enforcement to try to locate
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE 1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your vehicle your vehicle. If your vehicle is recovered, you will be
may be located by anyone who has your PIN and contacted by law enforcement.
ASSISTANCE FAQ S access to your account. It is your responsibility to
3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance rates?
1. What is the phone number for roadside assistance guard your PIN accordingly. See the Uconnect and
Some insurance providers offer lower rates on
call? The phone number is: SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for more
vehicles equipped with systems that can deter auto
information.
 US: 1-800-521-2779 theft. When shopping for insurance, be sure to inform
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the the insurance provider of your SiriusXM Guardian™
 Canada: 1-800-363-4869
lights? Depending on various conditions, it can take connected services subscription to find out if the
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™, does it three minutes or more for the request to get through insurance provider can offer you a lower rate.
cover towing or other expenses incurred by using to your vehicle.
roadside assistance? No, however your new vehicle
may include Roadside Assistance Call services.
190 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: 5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with the CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance companies, and cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? No. If the
SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an insurance product. You are vehicle is in motion, the cancel Remote Vehicle Start FAQ S — IF E QUIPPED
responsible for obtaining insurance coverage for your button will not stop the vehicle.
1. How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™
vehicle and yourself. 6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded account? There are three ways that you can register
App? The Vehicle Branded App has been designed to
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE work on most devices with the Apple® and Android™
your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account:
 Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed to an
S TART FAQ S operating systems. The capabilities of these devices
agent who can assist in registering your new
allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other
1. How long does it take to remotely start my vehicle? account.
operating systems may be supported in the future.
Depending on various conditions, it can take three  Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu.
minutes or more for the request to get through to CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE H ORN Select the button to speak with an agent, who can
your vehicle.
& L IGHTS FAQ S assist in registering your new account.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded  Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu.
App? Your key fob will remote start your vehicle more 1. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the Enter your email on the touchscreen and then
quickly. However its range is limited. For example, lights? Depending on various conditions, it can take follow the prompts from the provided email. You
when you are leaving the stadium after the game, you three minutes or more for the request to get through will receive an email with an activation link that
can use the Vehicle Branded App to remote start your to your vehicle. will be good for 72 hours. Once you click the acti-
vehicle and have the inside of your vehicle 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded vation link, you will be prompted to fill out your
comfortable by the time you get to it. App? Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the information and accept Terms and Conditions.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless device? lights quicker; however, its range is limited. Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM
People sometimes lose their wireless devices, which Guardian™ home page to complete your profile
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them
is why security measures have been engineered into and demo the remote services.
on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can
the Vehicle Branded App. Asking for your username, use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by 2. Why do I need an email address? Without an email
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN help pressing the red Panic button. Otherwise, Remote address, customers cannot register for SiriusXM
to ensure that nobody can start your vehicle if they Horn & Lights will continue for a maximum of three Guardian™. Customers need to register so they can
happen to find your device. minutes. subscribe to receive additional services and create a
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using the App? SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for remote
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded
No. Driving your vehicle still requires the keys to be in command requests.
App? The Vehicle Branded App has been designed to
the vehicle. The Remote Start feature simply starts work on most devices with the Apple® and Android™ 3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security PIN?
the engine to warm up or cool down the interior operating systems. The capabilities of these devices Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN during
before you arrive. allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other the registration process. The SiriusXM Guardian™
operating systems may be supported in the future. Security PIN will be required to authenticate you when
accessing your account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or
MULTIMEDIA 191
performing any remote services, such as Remote Door selected at the then current subscription rate and on 15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires? Yes. If
Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn & Lights, or Remote every renewal date thereafter, unless you cancel your you have an annual subscription, your subscription
Vehicle Start. subscription by calling SiriusXM Guardian™ Care. If will be canceled the day you cancel. If you have a
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™ security PIN? you have not added a credit card to your account, monthly subscription, your subscription will be
If you’ve already activated services and forgot your SiriusXM Guardian™ will send you an email or letter canceled on the last day of the month in which you
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the in advance of your expiration date to remind you that choose to cancel.
PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site. your subscription is ending soon. 16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle? Before
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ payment 10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™ notifi- your vehicle is sold to a new owner, you’ll want to
account address? Your SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment cation preferences? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ remove your account information. This process
Account address can be updated online, or by calling Customer Care, or go to your Owner’s Site and then removes all personal information, returns the
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in update your preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™ Uconnect system to its original factory settings,
your vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner’s customer web portal. removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM Guardian™ 11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact SiriusXM and account information. To remove your account
Payment Account. Guardian™ Customer Care by pushing the ASSIST information from the Uconnect system, contact
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ profile? button on your rearview mirror or overhead console. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. 5
Your name, home address, phone number, email 12. How do I update my credit card information? Login to 17. What if I forgot to remove my account information
address and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN can be your Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile, then select before I returned my lease vehicle or sold it? Contact
updated online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit your 13. How do I find out how much longer I have on my 18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/data), 4G
personal information. Make your edits and click Save. subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer (data), or 5G (data) network connection compatible
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy them? Care. with my device is temporarily unavailable? The SOS
Your new vehicle purchase may have come with an Call and ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and choose a sub- not connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
included trial period for certain Apps and services. scription to view its expiration date. When your sub- (data), 5G (data) network. Services that required your
8. Can I access every App and service while driving? No, scription is about to expire, you will receive an email smartphone only direct calls to Roadside Assistance
some applications and services are not available or letter of notification. Call may be functioning if you have an operable
while driving. For your own safety, it is not possible to 14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire network.
use some of the touchscreen features while the subscription? Prorated refunds are provided from the
vehicle is in motion (e.g. key pad). date of cancellation for annual plans or longer.
9. What happens when my subscription comes up for Please see the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™
renewal? If you have added a credit card to your Terms & Conditions for refunds related to billing
account information, your subscription will be plans of other lengths and other circumstances.
automatically renewed for a term length in
accordance with the service plan that you have
192 MULTIMEDIA
DATA C OLLECTION & PRIVACY RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data which Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
may include information about your vehicle, your vehicle’s your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from scientific community.
health and performance, your vehicle’s location, your your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
utilization of the features in your vehicle, and other data. by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
The collection, use and sharing of this information is condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected performance does not satisfactorily improve from emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
services and is further described by the Uconnect Privacy repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
Policy, which can be found at www.driveuconnect.com/ the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone some situations or environments, such as aboard
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or operation when not using the Uconnect system. airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). This encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
information may be collected by SiriusXM® Connected REGULATORY AND SAFETY wireless radio Ú page 303.
Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with FCA US LLC for the
purposes stated in the Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle
I NFORMATION
health and diagnostic information including location data US/CANADA
may be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
Report to you.
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription,
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
this vehicle diagnostic health information, including
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
location data, may still be transmitted from your vehicle
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
and you may still have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
the human body.
Use of any of the connected services including SiriusXM
Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent to the collection,
use and disclosure of this information in accordance with
the Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this
information to be collected, used, or shared, you must
cancel your Uconnect services in their entirety by
contacting us as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy
Policy.
193
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ABS is designed to function with the Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result in WARNING!
degraded ABS performance.
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS)  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake WARNING! manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
performance under most braking conditions. The system  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip- safety of others.
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
control during braking. by improperly installed or high output radio transmit- Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of Light
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight such equipment should be performed by qualified The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. professionals. is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
The ABS is activated during braking when the system  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their as four seconds.
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
6
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or system is not functioning and that service is required.
likelihood of ABS activation(s). stop. However, the conventional brake system will continue to
You also may experience the following normal operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
characteristics when the ABS activates: from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
 ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
to hear for a short time after the stop) by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
traction afforded. on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
 Brake pedal pulsations
the light repaired as soon as possible.
 A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
194 SAFETY
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) WARNING!

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
SYSTEM The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natu-
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it vehicle. When Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) determines
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi- that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), tions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also
Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA) and Traction Control slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift
System (TCS). These systems work together to enhance BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
both vehicle stability and control in various driving reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers, and
conditions. the user's safety or the safety of others. it will only intervene during these types of maneuvers. It
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steering cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC) and Trailer Sway Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Control (TSC). other vehicles.
DST uses the integration of the Electronic Stability Control
NOTE:
Brake Assist System (BAS) (ESC) system with the electric power steering to increase
the safety level of the whole vehicle. In critical situations ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode. For
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking a complete explanation of the available ESC modes, see
(understeering, oversteering, braking with different grip
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The Ú page 195.
conditions), through the DST function the ESC system
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
controls the steering to implement an additional torque
the rate and amount of brake application and then applies WARNING!
contribution on the steering wheel, to suggest the most
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
correct maneuver to the driver. The coordinated action of Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions,
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
brakes and steering increases the safety and feeling of and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
vehicle control. lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll Mitigation
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit
of the system, you must apply continuous braking NOTE: (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump” The DST is a driving aid system and does not replace the especially those that involve leaving the roadway or
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless driver’s actions while driving the car. striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
released, the BAS is deactivated. reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
SAFETY 195
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) WARNING!

ESC Operation Modes
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the To disable ESC and other safety systems, follow the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the instructions provided.
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing There are three modes of active safety systems present on
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract these the vehicle:
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to help the road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
vehicle maintain the desired path. including those resulting from excessive speed in  ESC On
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-  Partial Off
 Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
appropriate for the steering wheel position.  Full Off
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
 Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than ESC On – Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-Wheel Drive
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
appropriate for the steering wheel position. Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabil-
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle ities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be This is the normal operating mode for ESC when operating
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the normal mode for
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of operating a four-wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or 4WD High.
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the others. The ESC system will be in “ESC On” mode whenever the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer vehicle is started or the power transfer unit (if equipped) is
 Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
or understeer condition.
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
shifted out of 4WD Low. This mode should be used for 6
most driving situations. ESC should only be turned to
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” for specific reasons as noted.
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC performance of the ESC system. Changes to the Refer to “Partial Off” and to “Full Off” for additional
system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction steering system, suspension, braking system, tire information.
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn NOTE:
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle It is recommended to select the mode "Partial Off" or "Full
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed modification or poor vehicle maintenance that Off" only for specific reasons.
and driving to the prevailing road conditions. reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can Partial Off – Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-Wheel
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High
rollover, personal injury and death.
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in deep
snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for
TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel spin
than what ESC normally allows.
196 SAFETY
NOTE:
WARNING! With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle stability
 When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive
ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC OFF maintaining stability. “Full Off” mode is only intended for
Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial off-highway or off-road use.
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of NOTE:
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.  “Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD
Low. The ESC system will be in this mode whenever the
 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC vehicle is started in 4WD Low or the power transfer unit
system is in the “Partial Off” mode. is shifted into 4WD Low.
ESC OFF Button  The “ESC OFF” message will display and a chime will
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC sound when the gear selector is moved from any posi-
Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High And 4WD
OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate. tion to the PARK (P) position and then moved out of the
Low
To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF PARK position. This will occur even if the message was
button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off. This The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway and cleared previously.
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation. off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. The ESC
NOTE: OFF button is located in the lower switch bank above the On models equipped with Selec-Terrain, the activation of
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow climate control panel. To enter “Full Off” mode, push and some driving modes provide partial off or full off of some
chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, hold the ESC OFF button for five seconds while the vehicle active safety systems in order to optimize performance in
it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” mode by is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, the specific modes.
momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button. Once the situ- ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate and an “ESC OFF” Partial or full off of the active safety systems will be
ation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC message will appear in the odometer. indicated by a light in the instrument cluster.
back on by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button. This
may be done while the vehicle is in motion. In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for the In "SAND" and "MUD", the active safety systems are
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS section) until partially disabled and put in place to ensure maximum
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At performance in the specific mode of operation. However,
speeds over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system automatically you can reactivate them completely at any time by pushing
switches to “Partial Off” mode. When the vehicle speed the ESC button.
returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system
will return to “Full Off” mode. The ESC OFF Indicator Light
NOTE:
is always illuminated when ESC is off. To turn ESC on In 4WD Low, the active safety systems are completely
again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button. This will bypassed in order to ensure maximum off-road perfor-
restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation. mance.
SAFETY 197
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Enabling HDC
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in “Partial
And ESC OFF Indicator Light Off” or “Full Off” modes.
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the The ESC OFF button is located in the center console.  The driveline is in 4WD Low.
ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It  The vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h).
should go out with the engine running. If the
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped  The Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on  The driver’s door is closed.
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has Activating HDC
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if driven
driven several miles/kilometers at speeds greater than down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is selectable by
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. the driver and can be adjusted using brake and throttle
input.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located in
the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires Driver Override:
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when brake application at any time. 6
Traction Control System is active. If the ESC Activation/
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk) Deactivating HDC
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving while in
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and following conditions occur:
4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending
driving to the prevailing road conditions. hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle  The driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or
NOTE: speed by actively controlling the brakes. brake application.
HDC has three states:  Vehicle speed exceeds 7.5 mph (12 km/h) but
 The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
remains below 25 mph (40 km/h).
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).  Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground, or is
 Each time the ignition is placed in the ON position, the
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding on an uphill grade.
ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previ-
with brake or throttle application).  Vehicle is shifted to PARK (P).
ously.
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop vehicle speed).
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
198 SAFETY
Disabling HDC continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If Disabling And Enabling HSA
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the the driver does not apply the throttle before this time This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
following conditions occur: expires, the system will release brake pressure and the current setting, see Ú page 57.
vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The system will
 The driver pushes the HDC switch. release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle Traction Control System (TCS)
 The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low. applied. TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
 The driver’s door opens. The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
 The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph (40 km/h) activate: applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
(HDC exits immediately.) reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
 The vehicle must be stopped.
Feedback To The Driver: feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD)
 The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate) grade or
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC functions similarly to a limited slip differential and controls
greater hill.
switch has an LED, which offers feedback to the driver the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a
 The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
about the state HDC is in. driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not
remain solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is  For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and
the normal operating condition for HDC. the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in the “Partial Off”
 The switch lamp will flash for several seconds then gears. The system will not activate if the transmission mode or the “Full Off” modes. For further information, see
extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch is in PARK. Ú page 195.
when enable conditions have not been met.
The HDC Switch is located within the Selec-Terrain knob in
WARNING! Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
the upper right position. There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
WARNING! as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving reduce engine power and apply the brake of the
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and NOTE:
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
objects, and most importantly brake operation to TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
conditions. Your complete attention is always required weight recommendations. For further information, see
Hill Start Assist (HSA) while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Ú page 107. When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
HSA is designed to help the driver accelerate the vehicle Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
or serious personal injury.
from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will
SAFETY 199
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to
the “Partial Off” mode. let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
WARNING! forward gear and enters standby mode when the vehicle is
in PARK (P).
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
load to eliminate trailer sway. width on both sides of the vehicle, 10 ft (3 m). The zone
length starts at the outside mirror and extends
approximately 20 ft (6 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed Rear Sensor Locations
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
I F EQUIPPED NOTE:
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
BSM uses two radar-based sensors, located inside the  The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
rear fascia/bumper to detect highway licensable vehicles rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the Ú page 201. 6
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the detection zones.
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.  If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is necessary to
deactivate the BSM system manually through the
settings menu to avoid a misdetection. For further
information, see Ú page 116.
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can
function properly. Do not block the radar sensors located
on the rear fascia/bumper with foreign objects (bumper
stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
BSM Warning Light
Rear Detection Zones

200 SAFETY
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three

different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Passing

Overtaking Traffic The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
less than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle remains in berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between does not require service.
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (25 km/h), the The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
warning light will not illuminate. traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
Side Monitoring adjacent lanes Ú page 303.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
Overtaking/Approaching
Opposing Traffic
SAFETY 201
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
WARNING! the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 mph when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system (2 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately alert is requested, the radio is muted.
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or 22 mph (35 km/h), such as in parking lot situations. Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before including reducing the radio volume. side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
NOTE: signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
injury or death.
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
Rear Cross Path (RCP) are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will object are present on the same side at the same time, both
not be able to alert the driver. the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of the audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be muted.
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles WARNING!
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the NOTE:
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect system, the radio is also muted. 6
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers When the system is in RCP, the system will respond with
driver. must be careful when backing up, even when using both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots RCP state always requests the chime.
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
Blind Spot Alert Off
injury or death.
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be a related
message on instrument cluster display. If BSM system is
Blind Spot Modes off, this message will be visualized every time the vehicle
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation that is restarted.
are available in the Uconnect system. NOTE:
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
RCP Detection Zones will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view used.
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
202 SAFETY
Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings NOTE:

Blinded Sensor  FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
In the case of a sensor that is blinded:
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
 BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continuously When the system determines that a forward collision is
 An instrument cluster dedicated message will display probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
NOTE: visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
The rear fascia/bumper must be clean and free of any  If the driver does not take action based upon these
obstructing debris. progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
System Not Available
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
In the case of the system being temporarily unavailable: reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter- FCW Message
 BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continuously mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
 An instrument cluster dedicated message will display braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
system will compensate and provide additional brake
In the case of the system being completely unavailable: will be deactivated.
force as required.
 A chime will sound Vehicles With A Manual Transmission: After the end of the NOTE:
 An instrument cluster dedicated message will display intervention of automatic braking, the engine could stall,  The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph
NOTE: unless the driver can press the clutch pedal. (5 km/h).
Vehicle must be taken to the nearest authorized dealer for Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: After the end of  The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
service. the intervention of automatic braking, the transmission vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based on the
may remain in last gear stored: therefore the vehicle could course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW) lurch forward, once the brakes release a few seconds normal FCW activation and functionality.
WITH MITIGATION O PERATION — later. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation  The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
I F EQUIPPED the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
the brakes. surroundings.
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings (through the radio), visual warnings (within the If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below  If the vehicle enters 4WD Low, the FCW system will be
instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide the maximum automatically deactivated.
warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. braking possible to mitigate the potential forward collision.  The active braking is disabled when a trailer is
The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops connected with a Mopar® Trailer Towing system. If the
the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at vehicle is equipped with an aftermarket system, it is
potential collision. standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes. recommended that the Active Braking is turned off
manually Ú page 303.
SAFETY 203
WARNING!
Changing FCW Sensitivity FCW Limited Warning
By changing the settings on the menu of the Uconnect If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW Limited
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to system, you can change the sensitivity of the system by Functionality” or “FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every choosing one of the following three options: "Near", Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
type of potential collision. The driver has the "Medium" or "Far" Ú page 116. limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this The default option is "Medium". This setting allows the
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
warning could lead to serious injury or death. system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
vehicle in front when it is at a standard distance,
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
intermediate between the “Near” and “Far” settings.
see an authorized dealer.
Turning FCW On Or Off By setting the sensitivity of the system to "Far", the system
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the will warn the driver of a possible accident with the vehicle Service FCW Warning
Uconnect settings. in front when the latter is at a greater distance, giving you If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
the chance to act on the brakes in a more limited and reads: “FCW Unavailable Service Required”, this indicates
NOTE:
gradual way. This setting gives the driver the maximum there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
The default status of FCW is “Warning + Active Braking,”
possible time of reaction to prevent a possible accident. still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you and enable the active NOTE: checked by an authorized dealer.
braking. The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” Warning
6
 Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates the possible collision warnings experienced.
The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
system, so no warning or active braking will be avail- By changing the option to "Near", the system will warn the warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
able in case of a possible collision. driver of a possible accident with the vehicle ahead of it system performance. This most often occurs at times of
 Changing the FCW status to “Only warning” prevents when the latter is a reduced distance. This setting offers a poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The system
the system from providing limited active braking, or reaction time to the driver lower than the settings may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
additional brake support if the driver is not braking "Medium" and "Far", in the case of a potential accident, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision, providing a more dynamic driving of the vehicle. cluster display will read “FCW Front Radar Sensor
but maintains the audible and visual warnings. NOTE: Temporarily Blocked” and the system will deactivate.
Changing the status of the system can be done at any time The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of FCW The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
in the vehicle's head unit. possible collision warnings experienced. message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
NOTE: The setting of the sensitivity of the system is maintained in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
When the system is turned off, the FCW system state will memory when the engine is switched off. ice and snow). The system will recover after the vehicle
reset. has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path, this
warning may temporarily occur.
204 SAFETY
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of Entering or exiting a large curve, the system could detect
an obstruction. In absence of visible obstructions on the the presence of a vehicle that is in front of the vehicle, but
fascia/bumper, it could be necessary to wipe off the radar that does not preside in the same lane. In cases such as
directly on the surface, after having the radar cover this, the system might respond.
removed. It’s recommended that an authorized dealer
perform this operation.
NOTE:
 If the “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
authorized dealer. Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
 Installing a snow plow or front-end protector is not
Vehicles that suddenly change lanes, or stay in the traffic
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and
lane of their vehicle while moving into the field of action of
inhibit FCW operation.
the radar sensor, may cause the intervention of the
 Use only a soft cloth for cleaning. Do not use solvents system.
or abrasive pastes. Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
 The radar is equipped with a defrost system, so in Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
some climatic conditions it could reach high tempera-
The system is not able to detect the presence of vehicles
tures. Wait at least 30 seconds after the engine has
that are in front of the vehicle but placed outside the field
been turned off before touching the sensor.
of action of the radar sensor and could therefore not react
Precautions While Driving With FCW in the presence of small vehicles such as bicycles or
In certain driving conditions, such as: motorcycles.
 Driving in the vicinity of a curve

 Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane
 Lane changing of other vehicles
 Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersection
The intervention of the system could be unexpected or Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
delayed. The driver must therefore always pay particular
attention, while maintaining control of the vehicle to drive
in complete safety.
SAFETY 205
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light will turn off
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle that no adjustment for this increased pressure. only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
crossed the range of the radar sensor in an oncoming See Ú page 278 on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
intersection. tires. NOTE:
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
pressure loss through the tire. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light off.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire CAUTION!
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended  The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light) illuminates, you have been established for the tire size equipped on
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to damage may result when using replacement equip-
turn off. ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
The system will automatically update and the Tire
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on after- 6
market wheels, and may contribute to a poor overall
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM Pressure Monitoring System Light will turn off once the
system performance. Customers are encouraged to
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
(TPMS) may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
use Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels
to ensure TPMS feature operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle information.  Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
recommended cold placard pressure. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
means that when the outside temperature decreases, the checked.
tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light. Driving the ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to could damage the TPMS sensor.
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure
into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase Monitoring System Light will still be on. In this situation,
206 SAFETY
NOTE: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
PRESSURE WARNINGS fault can occur due to any of the following:
 The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure  Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light will
or condition. facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW
 The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge TPMS sensors.
TIRE PRESSURE” message will display in the
while adjusting your tire pressure, unless your vehicle instrument cluster, an "Inflate to XX" message  Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert (TFA) system. will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire affects radio wave signals.
 Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires.  Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla- Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, ings.
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,  Using tire chains on the vehicle.
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold  Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
 The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" Vehicles With Compact Spare Or Non-Matching Full Size
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire message. Once the system receives the updated tire Spare
pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if pressures, the system will automatically update and the
underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumi- Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light will turn off. 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size
nation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light. spare tire does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring
NOTE: System sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
 Seasonal temperature changes will affect TPMS infor- When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be the pressure in the spare tire.
mation on your instrument cluster Ú page 303. increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
Base System recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light off. The vehicle may
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to sound and the TPMS Light and “LOW TIRE
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this infor-
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each PRESSURE” and "Inflate to XX" messages will turn on
mation.
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure upon the next ignition cycle.
readings to the receiver module.
SERVICE TPMS WARNING 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
NOTE: 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Light will flash on and
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
It is particularly important for you to check the tire off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
Monitoring System Light will flash on and off for
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to 4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault
maintain the proper pressure. sound and the TPMS Light will flash on and off for
will also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this
The TPMS consists of the following components: sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
 Receiver module exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light will 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light spare or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will
SAFETY 207
update automatically and the “TPMS Light” will turn message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic SERVICE TPMS WARNING
off, as long as no tire pressure is below the showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active pressure values in a different color. When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to Monitoring System Light will flash on and off for 75
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
TPMS to receive this information. also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum
Tire Pressure Monitoring System of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
Operation
received.
TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light
transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
NOTE: message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
It is particularly important for you to check the tire display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Warning
due to any of the following:
maintain the proper pressure. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different
 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to 6
The TPMS consists of the following components: facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s TPMS sensors
 Receiver module recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors  Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the
 Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, affects radio wave signals
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
which display in the instrument cluster  Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light ings
instrument cluster will return to their original color, and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light will turn off.  Using tire chains on the vehicle
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW  Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
NOTE:
PRESSURE WARNINGS When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light will increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the assembly has a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
chime will sound when tire pressure is low in Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light off. sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
one or more of the four active road tires. In The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes 2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
addition, the instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low" above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
this information. limit, a chime will sound and the TPMS Light will turn
208 SAFETY
on upon the next ignition key cycle. In addition, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds the pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition
instrument cluster will display a Tire Low message, an and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure switch cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or flash the
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing the low value. TPMS and display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
tire pressure value in a different color. 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will in the instrument cluster display but dashes (--) will remain
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above sound, the TPMS Light will flash on and off for in place of the pressure values.
15 mph (24 km/h) the “TPMS Light” will turn off, as 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
4. The instrument cluster will display a graphic showing dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
the tire pressure value in the same color as the other 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off,
pressure values in place of the different color low tire reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact and the instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
pressure value. The instrument cluster will also spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update SYSTEM” message. The instrument cluster will also
display a dedicated message to remind you to service automatically. In addition, the TPMS Light will turn off display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
the flat tire. and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
a new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
Vehicles With Compact Spare Or Non-Matching Full Size exists.
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
Spare
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size
does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the this information. Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
pressure in the compact spare tire. are the restraint systems:
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire  Seat Belt Systems
ignition key cycle, the TPMS Light will remain on and assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when  Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the installing Winter wheel and tire assemblies on your  Child Restraints
instrument cluster will still display a different color vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
Some of the safety features described in this section may
pressure value and an "Inflate to XX" message. wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Light will flash on and authorized dealer.
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Light will flash
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the
addition, the instrument cluster will display a
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of
SAFETY 209
I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. Ú page 299 for customer service contact
(BeltAlert)
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep information. Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
you and your passengers as safe as possible. BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the WARNING! driver and outboard front seat passenger to
risk of harm from a deploying air bag: buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active whenever the ignition switch is in the
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
START or ON/RUN position.
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
seat. younger, including a child in a rear-facing child Initial Indication
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat restraint. If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front the START or ON/RUN position a chime will signal for a few
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
seating position Ú page 221. restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
restraint in that vehicle. solid red and remain red until the seat belt is buckled.
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
After the driver and outboard front seat passenger have 6
buckled their seat belts all Seat Belt Reminder Lights will
proper child restraint Ú page 221.
SEAT BELT S YSTEMS turn off. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind active when the outboard front passenger seat is
them or under their arm. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even unoccupied. The cluster display will inform the driver that
5. You should read the instructions provided with your on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver you must fasten the driver’s seat belt in order to release
child restraint to make sure that you are using it and could cause a collision that includes you. This can the parking brake.
properly. happen far away from home or on your own street.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
shoulder belts properly. can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air unbuckled (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
bags room to inflate. not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle times.
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
210 SAFETY
solid red until the driver and outboard front seat under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
passenger are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of WARNING!
may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle WARNING! internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
their seat belts. seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
Change Of Status severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger unbuckles your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-  Two people should never be belted into a single seat
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear belt. People belted together can crash into one
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are your seat belt even though you have air bags. another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
buckled again. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
 In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled than one person, no matter what their size.
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are WARNING!
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that buckled up properly.
 A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
and cargo is properly stowed.
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized killed. as low as possible and keep it snug.
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle  A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
NOTE: belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-  A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
Lap/Shoulder Belts tion to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/ the event of a crash. too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
shoulder belts. ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
(Continued)
nearest you.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the (Continued)
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
SAFETY 211
WARNING!
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
 A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop- adjust the seat.
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
your seat belt snugly. seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
 A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck belt to go around your lap.
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
 A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt 6
be used together. reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
 A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Positioning The Lap Belt

212 SAFETY
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and

chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is WARNING!
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The  Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate  Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
fully.
 Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure the vehicle is stationary.
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ Adjustable Upper Anchorage
shoulder belt. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
anchor point. are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch that it is locked in position.
plate. NOTE:
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
the latch plate. belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
WARNING!
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer they are wearing a seat belt.
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
and move it up or down to the position that serves you seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
best.
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
(Continued) the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
SAFETY 213
Seat Belt Pretensioner WARNING!

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
work for all size occupants, including those in child restraint.
restraints.  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
NOTE: seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations restraint in that vehicle.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat 2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until 6
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in the entire seat belt is extracted.
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to buckle until you hear a "click.”
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
release webbing in a controlled manner. In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
(ALR) Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. locking mode.
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. The restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position. For more information, see Ú page 227.
214 SAFETY
 Steering Wheel and Column The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
WARNING!  Instrument Panel instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
 The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the  Knee Impact Bolsters detected that could affect the air bag system. The
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
feature or any other seat belt function is not working While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
 Seat Belt Buckle Switch
properly when checked according to the procedures free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
 Supplemental Side Air Bags dealer service the air bag system immediately.
in the Service Manual.
 Supplemental Knee Air Bags
 The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
 Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could  Front and Side Impact Sensors
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
increase the risk of injury in collisions.  Seat Belt Pretensioners the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
 Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain  Seat Track Position Sensors  The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children Air Bag Warning Light eight-second interval.
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only  The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts remains on while driving.
restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
of the air bag system whenever the ignition NOTE:
switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/ If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
SUPPLEMENTAL R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/ gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
LOCK position the air bag system is not on and the air bags (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
(SRS) will not inflate. may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. WARNING!
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the MAR/ protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
associated with the electrical Air Bag System Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
following Air Bag System Components: Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A system immediately.
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
Air Bag System Components again after initial startup.
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
 Air Bag Warning Light
SAFETY 215
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light WARNING!

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will restraint in that vehicle.
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer Features
service the vehicle immediately Ú page 61. Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
Front Air Bags 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for 2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
Knee Air Bag
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are which may receive information from the front impact
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver 3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering 6
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The WARNING! output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air
 Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument output is used for more severe collisions.
bag covers.
panel during front air bag deployment could cause This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an Advanced Front Air Bags.
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
restraint. seat position.
(Continued)
216 SAFETY
WARNING!
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
 No objects should be placed over or near the air bag Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because have deployed.
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
inflate. position, away from an inflating air bag. front air bags.
 Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
Supplemental Side Air Bags
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator
the air bags and you could be injured because the air units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
bags may no longer be functional. The protective inflate the front air bags. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper Side Air Bags (SABs).
only when the air bags are inflating. passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli- your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
seat belts even though you have air bags. Knee Impact Bolsters during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
structure.
Front Air Bag Operation driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
WARNING!
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all  Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
frontal collisions, including some that may produce bolsters in any way.
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.  Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of radios, etc.
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
SAFETY 217
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard

side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB WARNING!
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the  Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
speed and with such a high force that it could injure SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are should remain free from any obstructions.
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
 In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
WARNING! install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be Label Location installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
pushed into you, causing serious injury. roof of the vehicle for any reason.
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential Side Impacts
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side 6
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
bag. that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
certain side impact events. right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
218 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side WARNING! ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger  Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy- certain rollover or side impact events.
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. Air Bag System Components
 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more NOTE:
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
blink your eyes.
collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air
WARNING! Bags.
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
 Air Bag Warning Light
 Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or  Steering Wheel and Column
NOTE:  Instrument Panel
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or  Knee Impact Bolsters
they will open during air bag deployment.
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
in an infant or child restraint. Rollover Events  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
 Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to  Supplemental Side Air Bags
are necessary for your protection in all collisions. activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint  Supplemental Knee Air Bags
They also help keep you in position, away from an Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a  Front and Side Impact Sensors
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
 Seat Belt Pretensioners
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
 Seat Track Position Sensors
belts properly and sit upright with their backs against not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and
the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a seat belt pretensioners should have deployed. If A Deployment Occurs
child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
the size of the child. deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system after deployment.
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
NOTE:
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
WARNING! vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
system.
 Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center both sides of the vehicle.
of the seat.
(Continued)
SAFETY 219
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any NOTE:  Electric park brake
or all of the following may occur:  Automatic transmission gear selector
 Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
 The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions but they will open during air bag deployment.  Horn
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags  After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction  Front wiper
authorized dealer immediately.
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet NOTE:
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact Enhanced Accident Response System After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally In the event of an impact, if the communication network STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi- remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
see your doctor immediately. Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
 As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like Enhanced Accident Response System perform the tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the following functions: If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air  Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped) trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the  Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped) system by following the procedure described below. If you
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita- have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,  Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as Enhanced Accident Response System 6
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter- Reset Procedure
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc- vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System
 Unlock the power door locks After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
tions for cleaning. message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the
be in place to protect you. Response System: vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank
WARNING! Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door before resetting the system and starting the engine.
 Cut off battery power to the: Depending on the nature of the event the left and right
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat  Engine turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor  Electric Motor (if equipped) both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow
 Electric power steering the system reset procedure.
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.  Brake booster
220 SAFETY
Customer Action
NOTE: Customer Will See
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds.
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
Right turn light BLINKS.
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
Left turn light is OFF.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Left turn light BLINKS.
Right turn light is OFF.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within one
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.
SAFETY 221
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR) CHILD R ESTRAINTS
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
WARNING! Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain times, including babies and children. Every state in the
 Modifications to any part of the air bag system could crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
not modify the components or wiring, including EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
designed to record such data as: children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/
seats rather than in the front.
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket  How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
side steps or running boards.  Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts WARNING!
 It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag were buckled/fastened;
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on  How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler- In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a pro-
your vehicle that it has an air bag system. ator and/or brake pedal; and, jectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. even an infant on your lap could become so great that
 Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may These data can help provide a better understanding of the
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
6
not function properly if modifications are made. Take circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag NOTE: proper restraint for the child’s size.
system service. If your seat, including your trim cover EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat There are different sizes and types of restraints for
under normal driving conditions and no personal data
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized children from newborn size to the child almost large
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso- enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
authorized dealer. instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. restraint.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
222 SAFETY
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has NOTE:  Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety website for additional information: http://
 For additional information, refer to http://
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call
it in the vehicle where you will use it. child-car-seat-safety.html.
1-888-327-4236.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing
Infants and Toddlers
reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
Small Children
the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
Larger Children restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by
WARNING!
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in less than at least two years old. Children should remain
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child allowed by their convertible child seat.
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
WARNING! vehicle.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
child seats can be used either rear-facing or death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than (Continued)
SAFETY 223
Older Children And Child Restraints WARNING!

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing  After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for because it can loosen the child restraint attach- 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
children who are over two years old or who have outgrown ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has If the answer to any of these questions was “no”, then the
the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as  When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
child seat. remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
All children whose weight or height is above the the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts personal injury.
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the WARNING!
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
Children Too Large For Booster Seats Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt 6
vehicle by the seat belt. comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over will not protect a child properly, which may result in
the front of the seat when their back is against the serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
WARNING! seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
 Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant vehicle’s seat belt alone:
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly the vehicle seat?
when installing an infant or child restraint. 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
(Continued) of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
224 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Combined Weight of the
Restraint Type LATCH – Lower Anchors LATCH – Lower Anchors + Seat Belt + Top Tether
Child + Child Restraint Seat Belt Only
Only Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Forward-Facing Child
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Restraint
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
(LATCH) Restraint System Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top child restraint. Please see the following table for more
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. information.
LATCH Label
SAFETY 225
LATCH Positions For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) 6
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor
65 lb (29.5 kg)
the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lb
(29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach
a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a
No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more
information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
No
anchorages from the outboard seating positions? position.
226 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the
center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? No
seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s
manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
The lower anchorages are round bars that are There are tether strap anchorages behind each tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it rear seating position located on the back of the tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
meets the seatback, below the anchorage seat. attached to the anchorage.
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child Center Seat LATCH
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. WARNING!
 Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
 Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
Tether Anchorage Locations than one child restraint. For typical installation
instructions, see Ú page 227.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage Always follow the directions of the child restraint
Lower Anchorage Location - Rear Outboard Seats manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Passenger Side (Example Shown) child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
SAFETY 227
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR Installing Child Restraints Using The
Restraint (ALR) Seat Belt: Vehicle Seat Belt
If the selected seating position has a Switchable When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
belt, following the instructions below. See Ú page 227 to by other occupants or being used to secure child shoulder belt.
check what type of seat belt each seating position has. restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before WARNING!
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more  Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
anchorages. child could be badly injured or killed.
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
that seating position. If the second row seat can be restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the head belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat are not toys and that they should not play with them.
can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make WARNING! equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
room for the child seat. You may also move the front (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat 6
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.  Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
seating position.
installing an infant or child restraint. back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
the top tether anchorage. See Ú page 229 for  Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
retractor.
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
directions to attach a tether anchor.
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching Ú page 213 for additional information on ALR.
restraint rearward and downward into the seat. other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child Please see the table below and the following sections for
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. more information.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
228 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing

Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a
Weight limit of the Child
using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward-facing child forward-facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the
Restraint
restraint? child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
Yes
seat? allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
of the child restraint?
SAFETY 229
Installing A Child Restraint With A 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
against the child seat.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Tether Anchorage:
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
(ALR): of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt WARNING!
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/ to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
shoulder belt. retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
WARNING! strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
that is approved for that seating position, located
 Improper installation or failure to properly secure a locked, you should not be able to pull out any
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See Ú page 224 for
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
the location of approved tether anchorages in your
child could be badly injured or killed. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the vehicle.
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions lap portion around the child restraint while you push
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect 6
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint tether strap. For directions to attach a tether anchor,
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
see Ú page 229.
be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
room for the child seat. You may also move the front pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the install the child restraint to find the tether
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. anchorage. If the seat can be moved, you may need
path. to move the seat forward to provide better access to
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
“click.” anchorage for that seating position, move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
230 SAFETY
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path

WARNING! TRANSPORTING P ETS
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where make sure the tether strap does not slip into the An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
possible, route the tether strap under the head opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, in the strap. collision.
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
around the outboard side of the head restraint. pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to SAFETY TIPS belts.
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS CONNECTED VEHICLES
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
WARNING! information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi- & Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.or
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
serious injury or death. Ú page 69.
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people WARNING!
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible
injured or killed. outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
Rear Seat Tether Anchors control could occur that may result in an accident
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and involving serious injury or death.
WARNING! using a seat belt properly.
 An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
(Continued)
SAFETY 231
SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE Floor Mat Safety Information WARNING!

I NSIDE THE VEHICLE Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
 ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
Seat Belts accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
system. is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have WARNING! the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor conditions,  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or authorized An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause passenger’s side floor area.
FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for inspection.
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
Air Bag Warning Light clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
eight seconds as a bulb check when the  ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install of vehicle control. 6
mode. If the light is either not on during your floor mat upside down or turn your floor  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. position of the floor mat and may cause interference
possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with
 ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing  If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle additional floor mat on top of an existing floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
immediately Ú page 208. mat. vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
Defroster  ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat  It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an mat for the specific make, model, and year of your your floor mat has been properly installed and is
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is vehicle. secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
inoperable.
(Continued) by lightly pulling mat.
232 SAFETY
PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD EXHAUST GAS seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
WARNING! for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Tires Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow WARNING!
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. these safety tips:
Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.  Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
confined areas any longer than needed to move your monoxide poisoning:
Lights vehicle in or out of the area.
 Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and  If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn rear doors open, make sure that all windows are kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
panel. at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
Door Latches is stopped in an open area with the engine running
 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
Fluid Leaks blower at high speed.  Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust side windows fully open.
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
system.
immediately.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
233
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
If equipped, the overhead console contains an SOS and
ASSIST button.
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the though the ignition is placed in OFF mode.
switch bank below the radio. NOTE: WARNING!
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
down your battery. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
SOS AND ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber Ú page 303.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button  The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you 7
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals (data) network, which comes as a built in function.
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are
SOS And Assist Buttons connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
Hazard Warning Flashers.
1 — SOS Button network.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when your 2 — ASSIST Button
vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard warning for
other motorists.
234 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call NOTE:

WARNING!
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.  The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
NOTE:
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be  Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, operator may be able to open a voice connection
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
push the SOS call button on the overhead console or press with the vehicle to determine if additional help is
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
overhead console. operator should be able to speak with you or other
trical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
2. The LED lights located within the SOS and ASSIST vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
buttons on the overhead console will turn green once the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
a connection to a SOS operator has been made. attempt to remain connected with the SOS oper-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
ator until the SOS operator terminates the connec-
3. The SOS Call system may transmit the following SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
tion.
important vehicle information to a SOS operator:  Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
 Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call. emergency responders and provide them with could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
 The vehicle brand. important vehicle information and GPS coordinates. it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
 The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
WARNING!
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator SOS Call System Limitations
through the vehicle audio system to determine if  If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
additional help is needed. or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer- capabilities.
WARNING! gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
vehicle immediately and move to a safe location. answer or respond to SOS system calls.
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper- NOTE:
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent The SOS Call function may not be available for the first
related to the use of the features and applications in operable network and GPS signal reception, which minute after the vehicle is started
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is
accident involving serious injury or death. required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 235
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon- NOTE:
following may occur at the time the malfunction is nected during a vehicle crash. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global party responsible for compliance could void the user's
 The overhead console lights located within the SOS Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or authority to operate the equipment.
and ASSIST buttons will continuously illuminate red. obstructed. Automatic SOS — If Equipped
 The Device Screen will display the following message:  Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an  Operator error by the SOS operator.
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
authorized dealer.”  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion. vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided
 An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device  Weather. radio supplement for complete information.
requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer.”  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
ASSIST Call
WARNING! WARNING! The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
 Ignoring the overhead console light could mean you ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
will not have SOS Call services. If the overhead ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering  Roadside Assistance (if equipped) – If you get a flat
console light is illuminated, have an authorized wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately. related to the use of the features and applications in you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Road-
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications side Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving
 The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a assistance.
accident involving serious injury or death.
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
 SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (if equipped) – 7
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint NOTE:  Vehicle Customer Care (if equipped) – Total support for
Control system immediately.
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by all other vehicle issues.
the subscriber.  UConnect Care (if equipped) – Total support for all the
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE UConnect feature.
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
to, the following factors: reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
 The ignition is in the OFF position. an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact. (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
 The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — WARNING!

5.
6.
Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
IF EQUIPPED  The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing opposite of the jacking position. For example, if
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the changing the driver’s front tire, block the passenger’s
Use this QR code to access your digital vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be rear wheel.
experience. jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
WARNING! slippery areas.
 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the WARNING!
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
the jack or changing the wheel. vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the Wheel Blocked Example
 Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You changing the wheel. NOTE:
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get vehicle is being lifted or raised.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift. 3. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P) (automatic
 Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
transmission) or REVERSE (R) (manual transmission).
a jack.
(Continued)
J ACK L OCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE 4. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire by 4 — Wheel Chocks
turning it counterclockwise.
5 — Screwdriver
If equipped, the jack and tools are located under the load
floor in the rear storage compartment. 6 — Emergency Allen Key
1. Open the liftgate.

2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle. WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
Spare Tire Fastener Removal J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS

5. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
Load Floor Handle prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
3. Remove the jack, wheel bolt wrench and chocks.  Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the 7
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
 Apply the parking brake and place an automatic
transmission in PARK.
 Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
Jack And Tools raised.
1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench  Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
2 — Jack jack.
3 — Emergency Funnel (Continued)
Jack And Tools Location
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift
WARNING! to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the area of the sill flange, centering the jack saddle inside
 Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter- the cutout in the sill cladding.
jack. clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
 Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
NOTE:
service center where it can be raised on a lift. Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are
critical. See the following images for proper jacking loca-
 Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for tions.
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
 If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
 To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground. Front Lifting Point
Jacking Locations
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Front Jacking Location
Jack Warning Label
4. Place the jack underneath the jacking location that is
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench. closest to the flat tire. Jacking location is indicated by
2. If equipped with wheels where the center cap covers a stamped arrow on the body. Turn the jack screw
the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.

WARNING!
7. Mount the spare tire.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
CAUTION! not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem in serious injury.
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
Rear Lifting Point leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice
Ú page 294. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts
are properly seated against the wheel.
12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks, and flat tire.
7
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
 Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
Rear Jacking Location spare tire or a limited — use spare tire
Ú page 288.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
 For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install
WARNING! a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the 8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to bolts.
remove the tire.
Properly Stowed Tire
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear)

WARNING!
5 — Power Plug (Located On Bottom Side Of
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard Tire Service Kit)
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
repair using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear storage
replaced immediately.
compartment inside the storage container.
1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED out from the bag and place it near the punctured
tire. Screw the clear flexible filling tube to the tire
TIRE SERVICE KIT S TORAGE Tire Service Kit Location
valve.
2. Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet
Use this QR code to access your digital TIRE SERVICE KIT C OMPONENTS AND socket. Start the vehicle engine.
experience.
The Tire Service Kit is located in the
OPERATION 3. Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I”
position. The electric compressor will be turned on,
rear storage compartment inside a sealant and air will inflate the tire.
storage container. Located inside the
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be
container are a screwdriver and the
reached within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not
emergency fuel funnel. To access the
been reached turn off and remove the Tire Service
Tire Service Kit open the liftgate and
Kit, drive the vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back and
remove the load floor.
forth, to better distribute the sealant inside the tire.
4. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor
directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation
process.
When the correct pressure has been reached, start
driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant
Tire Service Kit Components inside the tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the
1 — Power Button tire pressure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar),
do not drive the vehicle, as the tire is too damaged,
2 — Pressure Gauge
and contact the nearest authorized dealer.
3 — Warning Label
WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have  Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the  Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using following circumstances: case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this  If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
you, your passengers, and others around you. Have the  If the tire has any sidewall damage. induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
tire checked as soon as possible at an authorized
dealer.  If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure. REPLACING THE SEALANT
 If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat NOTE:
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat
tire.
the inflation process to reach the correct tire pres- Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration date at
sure and continue driving.  If the wheel has any damage. an authorized dealer.
5. Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it  If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
on the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that the wheel.
tire has been treated with Tire Service Kit.
 Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
WARNING! source.
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot after  A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or 7
use, so it should be handled carefully. hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries
TIRE SERVICE K IT USAGE P RECAUTIONS that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
WARNING!  Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service
 Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed WARNING!
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irri-
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Store the sealant canister in its special compartment,
tation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is
Kit. away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this
any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
(Continued) as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture and
(Continued) serious injury or death.
JUMP STARTING WARNING!

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump  Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.  Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
NOTE: flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
When using a portable battery booster pack follow the sparks away from the battery.
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING! Positive (+) Battery Post J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. 1. Apply the Electric Park Brake, shift the automatic
WARNING!
transmission into PARK (P) (manual transmission in Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
NEUTRAL) and place the ignition OFF. result in personal injury or property damage due to
CAUTION! 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical battery explosion.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other accessories.
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, set the CAUTION!
or electrical system may occur. parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
WARNING! or the discharged vehicle.
PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START
 Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the could establish a ground connection and personal Connecting The Jumper Cables
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly. injury could result.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
NOTE:  Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
The positive (+) battery post is covered with a protective the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive (+) 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery post. blades.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
(Continued) the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine, frame from the engine ground of the vehicle with the The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel
or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or large bolt. discharged battery. Ú page 237 for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If refueling is
The ground must be away from the battery and the necessary, while using an approved gas can, insert the
fuel injection system. 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
refueling funnel into the filler neck opening. Take care to
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster
open both flappers with the funnel to avoid spills.
battery.
NOTE:
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
with the discharged battery, and reinstall the
protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at an authorized dealer.
Jump Starting Example Label
CAUTION!
WARNING! Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw 7
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
could cause the battery to explode and could result in will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
personal injury. Refueling Funnel
prevent the engine from starting.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling 5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area. CAUTION!
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel is
provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can. Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
WARNING! vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over
See the following steps for refueling:
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.  Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
being filled.
nozzle. you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
 Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in immediately and call for service.
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on. NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable impending overheat condition:
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
 If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
while filling.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
 You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supple-
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
Inserting Funnel
an authorized dealer. engine cooling system.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the WARNING!
open.
potential for overheating your engine by taking the
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening. appropriate action. You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
 On the highways — slow down.
CAUTION! see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
 In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase engine idle speed. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
fuel tank after filling.
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be wheels or racing the engine.
moved out of the PARK position, see the following steps: For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission:
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved
A depleted battery will prevent the Electric Park Brake to at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
be applied. transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
1. Turn the engine OFF. seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE
or REVERSE.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
NOTE:
3. Carefully separate the gear selector boot assembly
Gear Selector Override Location Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic Stability
from the bezel.
Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode, before rocking
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position. the vehicle Ú page 195. Once the vehicle has been freed,
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. push the ESC OFF button again to restore “ESC On” mode.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot on the bezel.
WARNING!
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
7
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you
and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
Gear Selector Bezel Location back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) (with no matter what the speed.
automatic transmission) or SECOND (2) gear and
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. REVERSE (R) (with manual transmission), while gently
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into pressing the accelerator.
the gear selector override access hole (at the right
front corner of the gear selector assembly), and push
and hold the override release lever down.
CAUTION!
 Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after
every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
 When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
 Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels Off The Ground Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent  You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver- CAUTION!
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park  Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer Vehicle damage may occur.
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/  When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws attach to front or rear suspension components.
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
position, not the ACC position.
towing.
NOTE: If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on
 Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in
failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is engaged, order to move the vehicle Ú page 245.
will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels
off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
FRONT–WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) CAUTION!

FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four  Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed. remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels towing.
raised).
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
NOTE: mentioned requirements can cause severe transmis-
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and sion and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
remains released, while being towed. from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Front Tow Hook Locations
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
mentioned requirements can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is I F E QUIPPED
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver's side
of the vehicle.
7
FCA US LLC requires towing with all four wheels OFF the NOTE:
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the
flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised and the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the
opposite end on a towing dolly. vehicle. Rear Tow Hook Location
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without opening
CAUTION!
the door. During towing remember that not having the aid
 DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the of the power brakes and the electromechanical power
ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result. steering, greater force is needed in applying the brakes
(Continued) and steering of the vehicle.
WARNING! ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

 Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
(EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
 Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. Response System. performed under certain crash or near crash-like
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
serious injury. This feature is a communication network that takes effect
in the event of an impact Ú page 219. obstacle Ú page 221.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow
truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
249
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required”
message is displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon
NOTE:
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate under these
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). conditions.
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for message after completing the scheduled oil change.
scheduled maintenance.  Check engine oil level.
NOTE:  Check windshield washer fluid level.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change Under no circumstances should oil change intervals  Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluster. exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 1 year or 350 hours of wear or damage.
This means that service is required for your vehicle. engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and
engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will customers.
 Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
MAINTENANCE P LAN
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
Change oil and filter.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. 8
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Replace the Uconnect box (telematics box) battery (if

• • •
equipped).1
Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if
necessary, check Tire Service Kit expiration date (if • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
equipped).
Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment,
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument
panel warning lights, etc.).
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (brakes/
hydraulic clutch, windshield washer, engine coolant, • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
etc.).2
Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
tool).
Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork,
underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel
• • • • • • • •
system - brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves,
bushings, etc.).
Check windshield/rear window wiper blade position/wear. • • • • • • • •
Check operation of windshield washer system and adjust
• • • • • • • •
jets if necessary.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
16,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate locks and

• • • • • • •
cleanliness and lubrication of linkages.
Visually check the condition and wear of the front and rear
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
brakes.
Check the front suspension, tie rods, CV/Universal joints
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
and replace if necessary.
Visually inspect the condition of the accessory drive belt.3 • • •
Check the tension of the accessory drive belt. • •
Inspect and replace, if required, front end accessory drive
• •
belt, tensioner, and, idler pulley.3
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. • 8
Change engine oil and replace oil filter.456
Inspect the PTU fluid level. • • •
Inspect the rear differential fluid level. • • •
Replace spark plugs (1.3L Turbo Engine).7 • • •
Replace engine air cleaner filter.8 • • • • • • •
Replace brake fluid every two years.9 • • • • • • •

Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
16,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or

• •
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
1. The Uconnect box (telematics box) battery replacement has to be done every five years, regardless of mileage.
2. Always only use the fluids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged.
3. The maximum mileage is 75,000 miles (120,000 km). The belt must be replaced every six years, regardless of distance traveled. If the vehicle is used in heavy conditions (dusty areas, cold
climates, urban driving, long periods of idling), the maximum mileage is 37,500 miles (60,000 km). The belt must be replaced every four years regardless of the mileage.
4. The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed one year or 10,000 miles
(16,000 km).
5. Always only use the fluids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged.
6. If the engine oil quality detected by the vehicle diagnostics is lower than 20%, it is advisable to replace the engine oil and engine filter in order to avoid another service operation after a short time.
7. The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine:
 Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are especially certified for such engines Ú page 297.
 Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the “Maintenance Schedule” for spark plug replacement.
 Contact an authorized dealer if you have any questions.
8. The engine air cleaner filter should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas.
9. The brake fluid change interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
○ Recommend replacement
• Mandatory service
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1.3L T URBO E NGINE
1 — Oil Fill Cap/Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter (Located Under Engine Cover) 6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Battery
CHECKING OIL L EVEL There are four possible dipstick types:

WARNING!
 Crosshatched zone.
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to  Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range. be exercised when filling or working around the washer
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully solution.
warmed up engine is shut off.  Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. NOTE: MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
Engine Oil Cap/Dipstick Installation — 1.3L Turbo Engine markings on the dipstick. Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
Install the oil cap/dipstick aligning arrow on the cap with You will never have to add water, and periodic
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
arrow on the engine cover. maintenance is not required.
of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
WARNING!
CAUTION!  Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
engine.
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water Ú page 242.
ADDING W ASHER FLUID  Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
booster battery or any other booster source with an
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
Oil Cap checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
clamps to touch each other.
windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/
1 — Oil Cap/Dipstick Arrow
antifreeze) Ú page 253.  Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
2 — Engine Cover Arrow contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
NOTE:
CAUTION! Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may CAUTION!
 It is essential when replacing the cables on the void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi- assessed against you. chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) WARNING!
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor Synthetic Engine Oils
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
posts and free of corrosion. Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take use synthetic API approved engine oils.
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. numbers should not be used.
ENGINE OIL
Materials Added To Engine Oil
PRESSURE WASHING Engine Oil Selection The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
For engine oil selection Ú page 297. addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
washer is not recommended. American Petroleum Institute (API) its performance may be impaired by supplemental
CAUTION!
Approved Engine Oil additives.
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark
connections however, the pressures generated by these Filters 8
oils.
machines is such that complete protection against Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
water ingress cannot be guaranteed. The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20,
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
5W-40 engine oil. your area.
special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
ENGINE OIL FILTER AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
R–1234yf
every engine oil change. be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin
start of each warm season. This service should include (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection
Engine Oil Filter Selection
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a low
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters NOTE:
dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
should be used. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
NOTE:
SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements. system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrig- compressor oil, and refrigerants.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER erants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, Cabin Air Cleaner
requiring costly repairs. Refer to the Warranty Informa-
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 249. See an authorized dealer for service.
tion Book for further warranty information.
WARNING!  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants BODY LUBRICATION
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrig- tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate,
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air erants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary requiring costly repairs. periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar®
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is  The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
near the engine compartment before starting the high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease
personal injury. an experienced technician. should be removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper function.
CAUTION! When performing other underhood services, the hood latch,
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning lubricated.
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
system as the chemicals can damage your air
high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service

Position command (antipanic) must be active for at least
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the half a second.
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a At every valid activation of Service Position command, the
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations wiper blades are activated for 250 ms.
of salt or road film.
The Service Position command can be repeated several
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may times to bring the blades into the desired position, up to a
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use maximum of three times.
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. After three subsequent activations the strategy is
disabled.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with Function Deactivation: 1 — Wiper Blade
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. The functionality is reset if: 2 — Release Button
NOTE: 3 — Wiper Arm
 The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN position.
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on  Number of subsequent activations is three.
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-  Two minutes timer has expired after turning the ignition 4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, OFF. blade until it snaps into place.
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
NOTE: Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go into the
1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the
Service Position Strategy parking position.
wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.
The service position allows the wiper blades to be placed Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the wiper
in a position that allows the wiper blades to be easily
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade end while pushing the wiper blade towards the
8
changed.
blade off of the windshield. liftgate glass to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the wipers must wiper blade holder on the wiper arm.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper
be in the Park position before placing the ignition in the
blade. 3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
OFF position.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it. holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly push
Service mode must be activated within two minutes after the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
EXHAUST SYSTEM CAUTION!

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
 Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into  The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-  Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
system. ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device vehicle.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; and may seriously reduce engine performance and  Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; cause serious damage to the engine. disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;  Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
have an authorized technician inspect the complete vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In or malfunctioning operating conditions.
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, the event of engine malfunction, particularly
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of COOLING SYSTEM
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe WARNING!
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.  You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
vehicle.
WARNING! you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
 Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. will not require maintenance. However, it is important to when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
Ú page 232. the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
NOTE: fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can whether the engine is running or not.
materials that can burn. Such materials might be result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
grass or leaves coming into contact with your  When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
in areas where your exhaust system can contact engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
anything that can burn. and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
Coolant Checks system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if tempera-
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or rusty in tures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please
products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
rust products, as they may not be compatible with the
refilled with fresh engine coolant. Check the front of the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.  Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill recommended. NOTE:
NOTE:  Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
 It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
level of protection against freezing according to the
Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be needed to be added to the system please contact an
operated.
added to the system please contact an authorized dealer. authorized dealer.
 Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible Adding Coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended needed to be added to the system, please contact an
MS.90032). maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can authorized dealer.
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 249. be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)  Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and
before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
Selection Of Coolant maintenance period, it is important to use the same engine coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized 8
For further information Ú page 297. coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
the life of your vehicle. (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci- Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant, requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
may result in engine damage and may decrease corro- MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
sion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-  We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
nology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat- 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT that meets the
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling MS.90032.
Cooling System Pressure Cap Coolant Level  If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
 Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/ With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
recovery tank (if equipped). (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX”
engine which contains aluminum components.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
 Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. As long as the engine operating temperature is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once condenser clean.
WARNING! a month.  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
 Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over- level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overfill. result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up See an authorized dealer for service. poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is Cooling System Notes BRAKE SYSTEM
hot or under pressure. NOTE: In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
 Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci- When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers system components should be inspected periodically
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front Ú page 249.
damage may result. of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating WARNING!
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
Disposal Of Used Coolant opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
the radiator. a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
damage. Riding the brakes may also reduce braking
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
capacity in an emergency.
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in  Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the  Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
ground, clean up any ground spills immediately. If the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
immediately. bottle must also be protected against freezing.
Brake Master Cylinder WARNING!

Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
when performing under hood services, or immediately if  Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
the Brake Warning Light is on. spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the fluid level checks are not required; therefore the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid check your transmission fluid level using special service
avoid its contact with these surfaces. tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake  Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked when the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. This could result in a collision. transmission damage.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid CAUTION!

Ú page 298. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
WARNING! Special Additives dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
 Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any adjust the fluid level accurately.
Ú page 298. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can special additives in the transmission.
severely damage your brake system and/or impair its Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your product and its performance may be impaired by Fluid And Filter Changes
vehicle is also identified on the original factory supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. additives to the transmission. The only exception to this the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
 To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois- policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. of the vehicle. 8
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master affect seals.
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from the CAUTION! disassembled for any reason.
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged chemicals can damage your transmission components.
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
result in a collision. Warranty.
(Continued)
Selection Of Lubricant WARNING!

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use  Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
the manufacturer specified transmission fluid is off and that all the other services are switched off
Ú page 298. It is important to maintain the transmission and/or disengaged.
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.  If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
NOTE: rized dealer.
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;  If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
only the approved lubricant should be used. bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
CAUTION! blows, contact an authorized dealer. Blade Fuses
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer 1 — Fuse Element
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter current.
shudder Ú page 298. 3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
When a device does not work, you must check the (blown fuse)
electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
FUSES Also please be aware that using power outlets for
Access To The Fuses
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
General Information vehicle battery discharge. The fuses are grouped into four controllers located in the
engine compartment, under the instrument panel and on
WARNING! the inside of the left side cargo trim panel.
 When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit

The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the left side of the engine compartment.
Engine Compartment Fuse Location

Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw Proceed as follows: Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
1. Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise. Proceed as follows:
2. Slowly release the screw. 1. Properly secure the fuse cover to the box, slide
3. Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward. completely from top to bottom.
2. Press downward on the screw, using the special
screwdriver supplied.
3. Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
4. Release the screw.
Fuse Panel & Cover Location

1 — Mounting Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer
F02 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution Unit
F03 – 20 Amp Blue – Controller Power Supply Body Computer
F04 – 30 Amp Pink – Brake Control Electronics Module
F05 70 Amp Tan – – Electric Power-Assisted Steering
F06 70 Amp Tan – – Engine Cooling Fan
F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Automatic Transmission, GSM
F09 – – 5 Amp Tan Control Module Engine
F10 – – 15 Amp Blue Horn
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F11 – – 5 Amp Tan Supply Secondary Loads
F14 – – 15 Amp Blue WCAC Pump/Active Grille Shutters
F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Module Pump
F16 – – 5 Amp Tan Engine Control Module Power, Automatic Transmission
F17 – – 30 Amp Green Supply Primary Loads
F18 – – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner 1.3L Compressor
F20 – – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Power Four-Wheel Drive
F21 – – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – – 10 Amp Red Power Control Module Engine
F23 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Windshield *
F24 – – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmission
F82 – 20 Amp Yellow – Power Control Module Engine
F83 – 40 Amp Green – Air Conditioning Fan
F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All Wheel Drive 8
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors
F89 – 30 Amp Green – Heated Rear Window
Body Controller Fuse Center

The controller is located at the left side of the steering column at the bottom of the instrument panel.
For the fuse replacement see an authorized dealer.
Body Controller Fuse Cavities
Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F31 7.5 Amp Brown Flashes/Electrical Movement Front Seats/Fan Air Conditioning
F33 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Passenger Side)
F34 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Driver Side)
F36 15 Amp Blue Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, USB Port, Rear Ceiling Lights (With Sunroof), E-Call
F37 10 Amp Red System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus, All Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC, Brake Pedal Switch (NC)
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking
F42 7.5 Amp Brown Power Under Lock and Key, Brake Control Electronics Module, Electric Power-Assisted Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-directional Pump Washer
F47 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
F48 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
Supply ParkSense, Mirror, Heated Front Seats, Stabilizer Battery, ESC System, S&S Inhibition Command, Blind Spot,
F49 7.5 Amp Brown
Rain/Light Sensor, Humidity Sensor
Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F50 7.5 Amp Brown Supply Air Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning, Lane Departure Warning, Terrain Selector, Trailer Tow Module, Compass Module, Rear View Camera
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
F94 15 Amp Blue Power Socket
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit Fuse Holder No. 2

To access the fuses, remove the access door from the left Cavity Mini Fuse Description
rear panel of the rear cargo area.
20 Amp Sun Visor (Retractable
F1
Yellow Roof) Or External Fuse
20 Amp
F2 HIFI Audio System
Yellow
20 Amp
F3 MY SKY
Yellow
30 Amp
F5 Power Seat (Driver Side)
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities Green
2 — Fuse Holder No. 2 7.5 Amp Lumbar Adjustment
F6
1 — Fuse Holder No. 1 Brown Front Seat (Driver Side)
20 Amp
8
Rear Fuse Access Door F8
Yellow
Heating Front Seats
Fuse Holder No. 2
The fuses may be contained in two units. Fuse Holder No.
1 and Fuse Holder No. 2 (if equipped with trailer towing) Cavity Mini Fuse Description
are located closest to the rear of the vehicle. Controller Exterior
F5 15 Amp Blue Lighting Lights (Drivers
Side)
Controller Exterior
F6 15 Amp Blue Lighting Lights
(Passenger Side)
BULB R EPLACEMENT NOTE: Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part

Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric condi-
Numbers
General Information tions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions
change to allow the condensation to change back into a In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section
 Before you replace a bulb, check the contacts to be includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
sure they are not oxidized.
clearing process. NOTE:
 Replace the bulbs with the same type and wattage.
Based upon equipment options and current vehicle
 After replacing a light bulb, always check the correct
status, some lamps may not be equipped. See an autho-
orientation.
rized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
 Before replacing a bulb that is not functioning, check
that the fuse is intact.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable Roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable Roof) C5W
Interior Lights W5W
Dome Light (Glove Compartment) W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps (LED Version) LED
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps H13
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)/Front Turn Indicator PSY24W
Front Direction Indicator Lamps (If Equipped With LED Headlamps) PSY24W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Fog Lamps H11
Front Fog Lamps (LED Versions) LED
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) WY5W
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators (LED Versions) LED
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators P21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
Reverse W16W
License Plate Lamp W5W
Replacing Exterior Bulbs 2. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counterclockwise

then pull outwards.
CAUTION!
During bulb replacement do not touch the new glass
bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any
oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 8
Headlamps
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
Headlamp Bulb Cap
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the engine compartment and remove the
headlamp bulb cap. Headlamp Bulb Socket
3. Push on the locking tab on the headlamp bulb 5. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; turn it 3. Remove the electrical connector.
connector and remove the bulb and socket. clockwise making sure it is properly locked. 4. Releasing the two tabs, and remove the bulb and bulb
socket from the housing.
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with the
engine off. Also make sure that the engine is cold, to
avoid the danger of burns.
LED Headlamps – If Equipped

For replacement see an authorized dealer.
Position Lights/Daytime Running Lights/Fog Lights
Headlamp Bulb 1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door. Position Light/Daytime Running Light Assembly
1 — Bulb Socket
5. Install the new bulb and socket into the housing, and
engage the two tabs, making sure that it is properly
locked.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the access door.
Headlamp Bulb
4. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it is Position Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog Light Access
properly locked.
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
Front Fog Lights

1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
Fog Light Assembly Lamp Assembly

4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then replace 3. Remove the electrical connector by pushing the tab
the bulb. then disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the 4. Rotate counterclockwise to release the bulb socket
bulb is locked into place. from the lamp assembly, and remove it.
Position Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog Light Access 6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
1 — Screws 7. Reinstall the access door.
2 — Access Door LED Front Fog Lamps – If Equipped
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the
Front Side Indicators 8
electrical connector.
1. Operating from inside the engine compartment
using a suitable tool release the retaining clip.
2. Remove lamp assembly by sliding it toward the
outside.
Bulb Socket
5. Remove the bulb from the socket. See the following steps to replace: 2. Remove the transparent lens assembly as shown.
1. Remove the mirror cap on the outside rear view
mirror.
Bulb Transparent Lens Removed

6. Insert the new bulb in the socket. 3. Remove the bulb socket and bulb from the
Removing The Mirror Cap transparent lens assembly by rotating the socket
7. Reinstall the bulb and socket into the lamp assembly
by turning it clockwise, making sure it is locked into counterclockwise.
place.
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly on the car, making sure
it is locked into place.
Side Indicators on External Rear View Mirrors –
If Equipped
CAUTION!
The procedure is described as a guideline. For the
replacement of the lamp it is recommended that you Transparent Lens Location
contact an authorized dealer. Bulb Removal
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by pulling the 3. Using a suitable tool remove fastener.
bulb straight out. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the
5. Insert the new bulb, making sure that it is locked into release.
place.
6. Reinstall the socket into the transparent lens
assembly.
7. Reinstall the cover on the outside rear view mirror,
making sure it is locked into place.
Rear Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
Tail Lamp Removal
 Position Lights
 Stop Lights 6. Unscrew the screws and remove the rear tail lamp
holder.
 Direction Indicator
 REVERSE Lights Rear Lamp Fastener And Electrical Connector
1 — Electrical Connector
1. Open the liftgate. 2 — Fastener
2. Using a suitable tool remove the door as shown.
5. Remove the rear tail lamp, sliding it toward the
outside as shown.
8
Rear Lamp Assembly

1 — Mounting Screws
Trim Panel Door

7. Replace the bulb as necessary. LED Rear Tail Lamps – If Equipped

Reverse Lights – If Equipped With LED Tail Lamps
1. Use a suitable tool to remove the screws and
remove the access door.
Reverse Light Assembly
Rear Tail Lamp Holder 1 — Bulb
1 — Tail Light
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then replace
2 — Reverse Bulb
the bulb.
3 — Position Light/Stop Light/Turn Signal
4. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the
bulb is locked into place.
8. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked. Reverse Light Access
9. Reassemble the lamp assembly on the rear tail lamp 1 — Screw 6. Reinstall the access door.
housing, tightening the screws. 2 — Screw
10. Reposition the rear tail lamp on the car. 3 — Access Door
11. Secure the fastener of the rear tail lamp and
reconnect the electrical connector. 2. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the
12. Reinstall the door making sure it locked into place. electrical connector.
13. Finally close the liftgate.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 2. Remove the bulbs from the individual side contacts.
The CHMSL is LED. For replacement see an authorized 3. Insert the new bulbs, and ensure that they are
dealer. properly locked between the contacts.
License Plate Lights 4. Reinstall the license plate lens.
See the following steps to replace: NOTE:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the license plate lens. If removing the license plate lens using a screwdriver, be
sure to cover the tip of the screwdriver with a cloth so no
damage is done to the lenses or the vehicle paint.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1 — Retaining Clips
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light 2 — Bulb Housing
as shown.
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb

housing.
License Plate Light Location
Front Courtesy Light Housing

2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as
shown. Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are
License Plate Light
properly locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light 3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure that Rear Dome Light — Without Retractable Roof
housing making sure that they are properly locked. it is properly locked. See the following steps to replace:
6. Install the front courtesy light making sure that it is 4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror. 1. Using a suitable tool release the lamp assembly at
properly locked. both the ends.
Dome Light Glove Compartment
Dome Light Vanity Mirror See the following steps to replace: 2. Open the flap and replace the bulb.
See below steps to replace: 1. Open the glove compartment.
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the visor 2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull the
mirror light cover. bulb to replace it.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts,
and then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is
properly locked between the contacts.
Rear Dome Light Housing

1 — Bulb
2 — Flap
Bulb Removal/Installation
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked. 3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
Visor 4. Reinstall the dome light.
1 — Visor Mirror Cover

2 — Visor Mirror Light
Dome Light — MY SKY 3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
WARNING!
See the following steps to replace: 4. Reinstall the dome light.
 Before proceeding with the replacement of the lamp
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown remove the Interior Cargo Lights wait for the exhaust pipes are cool: DANGER OF
dome light.
See the following steps to replace: BURNS!
1. Open the luggage compartment and remove the  Modifications or repair of the electrical system
dome light assembly. performed incorrectly and without taking into
2. Open the light cover and replace the bulb. account the technical characteristics can cause
malfunctions with the risk of fire.
 Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the
event of breakage be careful of the projection of frag-
ments of glass.
 Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only the
metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in contact
with the fingers, reduces the intensity of the emitted
Retractable Roof Light light and you can also affect the life of the lamp. In
case of accidental contact, rub the bulb with a cloth
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side dampened with alcohol and allow to dry.
contacts.
Light Cover
3. Close the light cover over the bulb. 8
4. Reinstall the dome light in its correct position.
Bulb
TIRES 4 — Maximum Load  LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
5 — Maximum Pressure tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera- the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, ture Grades  Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
Loading. NOTE: spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation.
Tire Markings  P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design Example: T145/80D18 103M.
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded  High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
Example: P215/65R15 95H. the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
 European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code

(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
8
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd
week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
Maximum Inflation Pressure
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
Tire Placard
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the 8
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard NOTE: (4) The resulting figure equals the
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must available amount of cargo and luggage
not be exceeded. load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
trailer towing Ú page 106.
be five 150 lb passengers in your
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard. The (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the (5) Determine the combined weight of
weight referenced here.
Tire And Loading Information Placard luggage and cargo being loaded on the
This placard tells you important information about the:
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit— vehicle. That weight may not safely
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. (1) Locate the statement “The combined exceed the available cargo and luggage
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. weight of occupants and cargo should load capacity calculated in Step 4.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and vehicle's placard. load from your trailer will be transferred
spare tires.
(2) Determine the combined weight of to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
Loading determine how this reduces the
the driver and passengers that will be
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will riding in your vehicle. available cargo and luggage load
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to (3) Subtract the combined weight of the capacity of your vehicle.
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire And Loading Information driver and passengers from XXX kg or
Placard Ú page 106. XXX lbs.
Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) =
295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and
towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
 For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity
for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
CAUTION!
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
Tire Pressure or over responsiveness in the steering. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and NOTE: reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
 Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
are affected by improper tire pressure: damage the valve stem.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
 Safety  Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
 Fuel Economy vehicle to drift left or right. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
 Tread Wear Fuel Economy “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
 Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
Safety resulting in higher fuel consumption. (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
Tread Wear cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
WARNING! inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
collisions. for earlier tire replacement. of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability temperature changes.
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure. Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage Tire Inflation Pressures the Winter.
that result in tire failure.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
 Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door. outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
At least once a month:
vehicle control. which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
 Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality outside temperature condition.
 Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judg-
You could lose control of your vehicle. ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
 Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.  Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
 Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Tire Repair NOTE:

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
meets the following criteria: a flat tire condition.
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high  The tire has not been driven on when flat. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
 The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle mode.
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.  The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6 mm). See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section for more
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment information Ú page 205.
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
loading and cold tire inflation pressures. additional information. Tire Spinning
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
WARNING! experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not For further information Ú page 245.
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. designed to be reused.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity WARNING!
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
Radial Ply Tires pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are
WARNING! inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited
stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no 8
matter what the speed.
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other changed after being driven under a Run Flat mode 14 psi
types of tires. (96 kPa) condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it
is not designed to be reused.
Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire Replacement Tires

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
help you in determining when your tires should be including, but not limited to: characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
replaced.  Driving style. wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equivalent
 Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
replacement is needed Ú page 286. Refer to the Tire And
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace- Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle Certification
ment. Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
 Distance driven.
equipment tire sidewall.
 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced See the Tire Sizing Chart example for more information
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sched- relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire
uled maintenance is highly recommended. Ú page 279.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
WARNING! tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
Tire Tread your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
1 — Tread Wear Indicators years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You original wheels.
could lose control and have a collision resulting in It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
serious injury or death. original equipment dealer with any questions you may
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
NOTE:
replaced. safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing
For further information Ú page 286. new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
WARNING! TIRE TYPES Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
 Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed All Season Tires — If Equipped during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
rating other than that specified for your vehicle. All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
may change suspension dimensions and perfor- If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
between different all season tires. All season tires can be size and type to the original equipment tires.
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; so may adversely affect the safety and handling
can cause unpredictable handling and stress to failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
steering and suspension components. You could of your vehicle.
handling of your vehicle.
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with Summer Or Three Season Tires — was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be
load ratings approved for your vehicle. If Equipped operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
 Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
other than what was originally equipped on your conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be pressures.
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
control and have a collision. driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
 Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer. studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
failure and loss of vehicle control. before using these tire types.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use 8
CAUTION! Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings. WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
NOTE: 103M.
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a T, S = Temporary Spare Tire use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
spare tire, please refer to Tire Service Kit for further infor-
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
mation Ú page 240.
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
your vehicle at the first opportunity. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
CAUTION! handling. Since it is not the same as your original
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a com- tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
pact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
to the vehicle may result. on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installa-
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated WARNING! tion of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle han-
for temporary emergency use Ú page 110. dling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire And
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
And Wheel — If Equipped have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern. Full Size Spare — If Equipped WHEEL A ND WHEEL TRIM CARE
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle
And Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and hot to the touch.
reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive NOTE:
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is the water droplets from the brake components. This
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
and tarnishing.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
CAUTION! Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may CAUTION!
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited recommended.
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
or equivalent is recommended.
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
SNOW TRACTION D EVICES

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage: 8
 Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
 No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
 Please follow the table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
Snow Traction Device (Maximum

Trim Level Axle Tire/Wheel Size Projection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
ALL Front 215/65R16 7 mm Cable Chain
WARNING! TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The suggested Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at diagram.
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable different loads and perform different steering, handling,
handling. You could lose control and have a collision. and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
CAUTION! The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
following precautions: maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and
 Because of restricted traction device clearance contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
between tires and other suspension components, it For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 249. The
is important that only traction devices in good condi- reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious prior to rotation being performed.
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
The suggested Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
is the “forward cross” shown in the following diagram. This
damaged parts of the device before further use. CAUTION!
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires
 Install device as tightly as possible and then that must not be reversed. Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
 Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should
 Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large be followed to balance tire wear.
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
 Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
 Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed, UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is The following tire grading categories
less than 30 mph (48 km/h). were established by the National
 Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. Tire Rotation (Forward Cross) Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the TRACTION G RADES and reduce tire life, and excessive
tire's manufacturer in each category is The Traction grades, from highest to
temperature can lead to sudden tire
shown on the sidewall of the tires on lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
your vehicle. represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
level of performance, which all
All passenger vehicle tires must conform passenger vehicle tires must meet
pavement, as measured under
to Federal safety requirements in under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
controlled conditions on specified
addition to these grades. Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
government test surfaces of asphalt and
represent higher levels of performance
TREADWEAR concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
traction performance.
The Treadwear grade is a comparative minimum required by law.
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire WARNING!
WARNING!
when tested under controlled conditions The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
on a specified government test course. straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
For example, a tire graded 150 would traction characteristics. sive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
wear one and one-half times as well on separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
the government course as a tire graded TEMPERATURE G RADES
100. The relative performance of tires 8
depends upon the actual conditions of
The Temperature grades are A (the STORING THE VEHICLE
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
their use, however, and may depart If you are storing your vehicle for more than three weeks,
resistance to the generation of heat and we recommend that you take the following steps to
significantly from the norm due to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
variations in driving habits, service  Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
under controlled conditions on a
practices, and differences in road  Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
characteristics and climate. tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
Sustained high temperature can cause fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
the material of the tire to degenerate
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility  Insects, tree sap and tar.  Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
of compressor damage when the system is started  Salt in the air near seacoast localities. that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
again.  Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
CAUTION!
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven for at BODY AND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE  Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
required to start the vehicle Ú page 70.
Cleaning Headlights scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
 Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
BODYWORK lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
AGENTS To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and Special Care
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To  If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are by rinsing. month.
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel  It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne open.
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is PRESERVING T HE BODYWORK  If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme touch them up immediately.
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, Washing  If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
and underbody protection.  Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
The following maintenance recommendations will enable in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.  If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
resistance built into your vehicle.  If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug packaged and sealed.
What Causes Corrosion?
and Tar Remover to remove.  If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint  Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar® or stone shields behind each wheel.
and protective coatings from your vehicle. Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect  Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
The most common causes are: your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
paint. match the color of your vehicle.
 Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
 Stone and gravel impact.
INTERIORS PLASTIC A ND C OATED PARTS leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
NOTE:
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and CAUTION! If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
carpeting.  Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
WARNING! painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may and the manufacturer recommends Mopar® total care
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately. leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
seats as needed.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed  Damage caused by these type of products may not
areas they may cause respiratory harm. be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION!
Seat Belt Maintenance Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Lenses damage to the upholstery may result.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care GLASS SURFACES
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the belts with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
properly. cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
8
WARNING! LEATHER SURFACES equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
leather upholstery.
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Dam- towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
aged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disas- Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular directly on the mirror.
semble or modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
involved in a collision, or if you have questions regarding act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar®
Care Program facility for inspection. Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
294
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) BRAKE SYSTEM TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The VIN is stamped on a plate located on the left front Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake Wheel Bolt Wheel Bolt
corner of the instrument panel cover, which is visible from systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal **Wheel Bolt Size
Torque Socket Size
outside the car through the windshield. capability, the remaining system will still function.
However, there will be some loss of overall braking 89 ft-lb
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel (120 N·m)
during application, greater pedal force required to slow or **Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light. bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
NOTE: wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
Wheel Mounting Surface

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 295
Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each bolt has recommended octane number can cause engine failure GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
engaged on the lug nut/bolt. Warranty. Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard oxygenates such as ethanol.
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before CAUTION!
considering service for the vehicle. DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
1.3L T URBO E NGINE of these blends may result in starting and drivability
This engine is designed to meet all emission problems, damage critical fuel system components,
regulations, and provide satisfactory fuel cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
economy and performance, when using and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
high-quality unleaded regular gasoline having illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
an octane rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2 clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
Method. 15% ethanol (E-15).
Torque Patterns
The use of a 91 or higher octane premium gasoline will
After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt torque to be allow these engines to operate to optimal performance. Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly tightened. This increase in performance is most noticeable in hot than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
weather or under heavy load conditions, such as while are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
WARNING! towing. void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
REFORMULATED G ASOLINE
not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
E-85 USAGE I N NON-F LEX FUEL
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
in serious injury. burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”. V EHICLES
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline 9
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
FUEL REQUIREMENTS improve air quality.
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
While operating on gasoline with the required octane The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Warranty.
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
making a heavy knocking sound, see an authorized dealer system components.
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
296 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
 Operate in a lean mode. the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline. CAUTION!
 OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
 Poor engine performance. MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL performance:
 Poor cold start and cold drivability.
 Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane  The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that mance and damage the emissions control system.
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
MODIFICATIONS reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in contains a higher level of detergents to further
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent  The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
Warranty. Gasoline retailers. as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of meth-
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and tives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
GASOLINE diaphragm materials. and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage NOTE:
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 297
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1.3L Turbo 12.7 gal 48 L
Engine Oil With Filter
1.3L Turbo 4.8 qt 4.5 L
Cooling System *
1.3L Turbo 8.8 qt 8.3 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Engine Coolant Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic
Engine Oil
SAE 0W-30 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
Ú page 255.
9
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0–15% ethanol
298 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Automatic Transmission Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
We recommend using Mopar® Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
(API GL-5).
We recommend using Mopar® Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
(API GL-5).
We recommend using Mopar® DOT 4.
Brake Master Cylinder
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every two years regardless of mileage.
299
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT with our products and services.
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. (Canada)
All work to be performed may not be covered by the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and Who is Covered
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
service history. This can often provide a clue to the current service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
problem. facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
PREPARE A L IST correctly and in a timely manner. start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in the
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the This is why you should always talk to an authorized Warranty Information book.1
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you are 1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club,
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of Inc. Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY,
where services are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of
service advisor know. the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need California, Inc., Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer What to Do
If you list a number of items and you must have your Assistance center. If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of gas/
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing as a
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At should include the following information: result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA :
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle 1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Provide your
 Owner's name and address name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required for
(additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
 Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office) covered services, license plate number, and your location, 10
 Authorized dealer name including the telephone number from which you are
an appointment.
 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) calling. Briefly describe the nature of the problem and
 Vehicle delivery date and mileage answer a few simple questions. You will be given the name
300 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival. If Flat Tire Service FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
you feel you are in an unsafe situation, please let us know. If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch a
With your consent, we will contact local police or safety service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare tire P.O. Box 21–8004
authorities. (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s Manual. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance This is not a permanent flat tire repair. Phone: (877) 426-5337
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you may nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We will P.O. Box 1621
submit your original receipts from the licensed towing or dispatch a service provider to deliver a small amount of
service facility, for services rendered within30 days of the Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a nearby station.
occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN, odometer This service is limited to two occurrences in a 12-month Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
mileage at the time of service, and current mailing period.
address. We will process the claim based on vehicle and MEXICO
service eligibility. If eligible, we will reimburse you for the Battery Jump Assistance
reasonable amount actually paid, based on the usual and No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
customary charges for that service in the area where they Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about Sante Fe C.P. 05109
were provided. FCA US LLC’s determination relating to being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to Mexico, D.F.
reimbursement is final. Correspondence should be mailed provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
to: In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Lockout Service
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen locks
P.O. Box 9145 are keeping you from getting on your way, help is just a PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
Medford, MA 02155 phone call away. This service is limited to providing access
to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not cover the cost of FCA Caribbean LLC
Attention Claims Department replacement keys. P.O. Box 191857
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or Towing Service San Juan 00919-1857
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance program is subject to restrictions Our towing service gives you peace of mind and Phone: (877) 426-5337
and conditions of use, which are determined solely by FCA confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of
Fax: (787) 782-3345
US LLC. a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 301
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you Use this QR code to access your digital
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you experience.
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
(TDD/TTY) Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA US We appreciate that you have made a major investment
LLC has installed special Telecommunication Devices for when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and MOPAR® PARTS
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
the ownership experience.
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by dialing factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
1-800-380-2479. dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it
WARNING! operating at its best and maintain its original condition.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES A ND
SERVICE CONTRACT in vehicles and certain products of component wear WASHINGTON, D.C.
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of Cali-
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle fornia to cause cancer and birth defects, or other repro- If you believe that your vehicle has a
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected ductive harm. defect that could cause a crash or cause
repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans injury or death, you should immediately
are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans
authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to
WARRANTY INFORMATION inform the National Highway Traffic
provide additional protection beyond your vehicle’s See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further
Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the information. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it 10
vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions may open an investigation, and if it finds
service contract, call FCA US LLC's Service Contract of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian
that a safety defect exists in a group of
and market.
residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 vehicles, it may order a recall and
French). remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
problems between you, an authorized To order the following manuals, you may use either the (Canada).
dealer or FCA US LLC. website or the phone numbers listed below. Or
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Service Manuals Call Tech Authority toll free at:
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at (888) These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a  1-800-890-4038 (US)
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go or components and is written in straightforward language
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled *If you have purchased this vehicle used or have changed
information about motor vehicle safety vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find your address, please provide the following information
and correct problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and mail to:
from http://www.safercar.gov. and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a
FCA US LLC
complete list of all tools and equipment.
I N C ANADA P.O. Box 21–8008
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
If you believe that your vehicle has a Procedure manuals, visit: Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
safety defect, you should contact the www.techauthority.com (US and Canada). Make sure to include the following:
Customer Service Department Owner's Manuals  Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)

 Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
immediately. Canadian customers who These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
located on top left of the instrument panel)
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
wish to report a safety defect to the acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.  Exact Odometer Reading
Canadian government should contact  First and Last Name
 Phone Number
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect  Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Investigations and Recalls at (800)  Email Address
333-0510 or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/ *Applies to US residents only.
Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 303
GENERAL INFORMATION La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes

dos condiciones:
ACC and FCW
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
TMB2 and UCONNECT 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
The following regulatory statement applies to TMB2 and interferencia perjudicial y Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
UConnect devices equipped in this vehicle: 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier 1. this device must not cause interference, and
TBM2 FCC ID : RX2TCUFCA025SN interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su 2. this device must accept any interference, including
operación no deseada. interference that may cause undesired operation of
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
RF Exposure Requirements the device.
UCONNECT FCC: Y7OVP2RFP
IC: 7812H-VP2RFP To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie
requirements, the device must be installed and operated Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development persons. suivantes:
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: This equipment complies with Canada radiation exposure 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and equipment should be installed and operated with radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
2. This device must accept any interference received, minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator and your susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
including interference that may cause undesired body.
operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations
the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
Science and Economic Development applicables aux rayonnements ISED établies pour un environnement non reasonable protection against harmful interference when
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et rayonnement et votre corps frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
NOTE: accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the harmful interference to radio communications. Operation
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
authority to operate the equipment. harmful interference in which case the user will be 10
required to correct the interference at his own expense
RF Radiation Exposure Information BSM CAUTION TO USERS

This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. with Industry Canada's RSS - 310 . Operation is subject to party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
This equipment should be installed and operated with a the following two conditions: authority to operate the equipment.
minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and 1. this device may not cause harmful interference, and
your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or 2. this device must accept any interference received,
transmitter. including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux
rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non Cet appareil est conforme au RSS - 310 d 'Industrie
contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis à la condition que
un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de cet appareil ne provoque pas d'interférences nuisibles et
rayonnement et votre corps. Ce transmetteur ne doit pas accepte toute interférence, y compris les interférences
être place au même endroit ou utilise simultanément avec susceptibles de provoquer un fonctionnement indésirable
un autre transmetteur ou antenne. de l'appareil
305
INDEX
A Air Pressure Fluid Type .......................................................262, 298
About Your Brakes ....................................................... 294 Tires..........................................................................284 Special Additives..................................................... 261
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control).............83 Alarm Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ...................... 44
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 259 Arm The System......................................................... 19 Auxiliary Power Outlet .................................................... 44
Adding Fuel................................................................... 106 Disarm The System ................................................... 19 Axle Fluid....................................................................... 298
Adding Washing Fluid .................................................. 254 Security Alarm..................................................... 18, 63 Axle Lubrication ............................................................ 298
Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 296 Alterations/Modifications
Advance Phone Connectivity ....................................... 150 Vehicle.......................................................................... 8 B
Air Bag........................................................................... 215 Android Auto........................................................ 152, 153 Back Up Camera........................................................... 105
Advance Front Air Bag ............................................ 215 Android Auto™ S ........................................................152 Battery.................................................................... 62, 254
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 216 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 259, 297 Charging System Light.............................................. 62
Air Bag Warning Light ............................................. 214 Disposal ...................................................................260 Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 14
Driver Knee Air Bag ................................................ 216 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................193 Belts, Seat..................................................................... 231
Enhanced Accident Response ...................... 219, 248 Anti-Lock Warning Light........................................... 64, 67 Blind Spot Monitoring .................................................. 199
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 248 Apple CarPlay ...................................................... 152, 155 Bluetooth
Front Air Bag ........................................................... 215 Apple CarPlay® S ......................................................154 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 218 Assist, Hill Start.............................................................198 Audio Device After Pairing................................. 146
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 216 Audio Settings...............................................................140 Body Mechanism Lubrication ...................................... 256
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 221 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................116 Brake Assist System..................................................... 194
Maintenance ........................................................... 221 Auto Down Power Windows............................................46 Brake Control System, Electronic................................ 194
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 215 Auto Up Power Windows ................................................ 46 Brake Fluid.................................................................... 298
Side Air Bags ........................................................... 216 Automatic Door Locks ....................................................22 Brake System ......................................................260, 294
Transporting Pets.................................................... 230 Automatic Headlights ..................................................... 33 Anti-Lock (ABS)........................................................ 294
Air Bag Light ................................................. 61, 214, 231 Automatic High Beams................................................... 33 Fluid Check.............................................................. 298
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........... 256 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 41 Master Cylinder ....................................................... 261
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................... 256 Automatic Transmission........................................74, 261 Warning Light ............................................................ 62
Air Conditioner Refrigerant.......................................... 256 Adding Fluid ................................................... 261, 298 Brakes ........................................................................... 260
Air Conditioning ............................................................ 256 Autostick .................................................................... 75 Brightness, Interior Lights.............................................. 35
Air Conditioning Filter ........................................... 42, 256 Fluid And Filter Change...........................................261 Bulbs, Light ................................................................... 232 11
Air Conditioning System............................................... 256 Fluid Change............................................................261
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.....................................42 Fluid Level Check ....................................................261
306
C Cleaning D
Camera ......................................................................... 105 Wheels .....................................................................288 Daytime Running Lights................................................. 33
Camera, Rear ............................................................... 105 Climate Control ............................................................... 39 Dealer Service .............................................................. 255
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 297 Clutch ............................................................................261 Defroster, Rear Window................................................. 38
Caps, Filler Fluid..........................................................................261 Defroster, Windshield .................................................. 231
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 253 Cold Weather Operation................................................. 71 De-Icer, Remote Start .................................................... 18
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 260 Compact Spare Tire ......................................................288 Deleting A Phone .......................................................... 147
Car Washes .................................................................. 292 Connected Services................ 177, 178, 179, 180, 188 Dimmer Switch
Carbon Monoxide Warning .......................................... 232 Connector Headlight ................................................................... 33
Cargo Area Features .......................................................51 UCI .............................................................................. 44 Dipsticks
Cargo Load Floor.............................................................51 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)......................... 44 Oil (Engine) .............................................................. 254
Cargo Tie-Downs .............................................................51 Console............................................................................ 43 Disabled Vehicle Towing .............................................. 246
CD.................................................................................. 141 Floor ........................................................................... 43 Disc Drive...................................................................... 141
Cellular Phone .............................................................. 192 Contract, Service ..........................................................301 Disconnecting............................................................... 147
Certification Label........................................................ 106 Controls .........................................................................132 Disposal
Changing A Flat Tire ..................................................... 236 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................260 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).................................... 260
Chart, Tire Sizing .......................................................... 279 Cooling System .............................................................258 Disturb........................................................................... 149
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light).........69 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................259 Door Ajar .................................................................. 62, 63
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............................... 230 Coolant Level ................................................. 259, 260 Door Ajar Light ......................................................... 62, 63
Checks, Safety.............................................................. 230 Cooling Capacity ......................................................297 Door Locks...................................................................... 22
Child Restraint.............................................................. 221 Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................................260 Automatic .................................................................. 22
Child Restraints Drain, Flush, And Refill............................................259 Doors............................................................................... 19
Booster Seats.......................................................... 223 Inspection ................................................................260 Drag & Drop .................................................................. 131
Child Seat Installation ............................................ 229 Points To Remember...............................................260 Driver Memory Presets ................................................ 139
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt................. 227 Pressure Cap ...........................................................260 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt.................................................... 24
Infant And Child Restraints .................................... 222 Radiator Cap............................................................260 Driving ........................................................................... 113
LATCH Positions...................................................... 225 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ................. 259, 297
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ........................... 226 Corrosion Protection.....................................................292
E
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.............. 224 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...................................... 82
Electric Brake Control System ..................................... 194
Older Children And Child Restraints...................... 223 Cruise Light .............................................................. 67, 68
Anti-Lock Brake System.......................................... 193
Seating Positions .................................................... 224 Customer Assistance....................................................299
Electric Park Brake......................................................... 72
Child Safety Locks...........................................................22 Customer Programmable Features .............................117
Electric Parking Brake.................................................... 72
City Center .................................................................... 166 Cybersecurity ................................................................116
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ..................... 44
Clean Air Gasoline........................................................ 295 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM).................................. 194
307
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control).....................82 Exterior Lighting .............................................................. 32 Gasoline................................................................... 295
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................ 195 Exterior Lights ........................................................32, 232 Gauge......................................................................... 64
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light......................62 Materials Added...................................................... 296
Emergency Gas Can Refueling.................................... 243 F Methanol ................................................................. 295
Emergency, In Case Of Family Alerts..................................................................188 Octane Rating.................................................295, 297
Hazard Warning Flasher......................................... 233 FAQ ................................................................................188 Requirements.......................................................... 295
Jacking..................................................................... 236 Features ........................................................................180 Specifications.......................................................... 297
Jump Starting.......................................................... 242 Filters Fuses............................................................................. 262
Overheating............................................................. 244 Air Cleaner ...............................................................256
Tow Hooks............................................................... 247 Air Conditioning ......................................................... 42 G
Towing ..................................................................... 246 Engine Oil.................................................................256 Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................................ 295
Emission Control System Maintenance.........................69 Engine Oil Disposal..................................................255 Gasoline, Clean Air ....................................................... 295
Engine ........................................................................... 253 Flashers Gasoline, Reformulated ............................................... 295
Air Cleaner............................................................... 256 Hazard Warning.......................................................233 Gauges
Break-In Recommendations .....................................71 Turn Signals ........................................34, 67, 68, 232 Fuel ............................................................................ 64
Checking Oil Level .................................................. 254 Flash-To-Pass.................................................................. 33 Gear Selector Override................................................. 245
Compartment.......................................................... 253 Flat Tire Changing.........................................................236 Getting Started ............................................................. 179
Coolant (Antifreeze) ................................................ 297 Flat Tire Stowage ..........................................................237 Glass Cleaning.............................................................. 293
Cooling..................................................................... 258 Flooded Engine Starting ................................................. 70 Go Home ....................................................................... 166
Exhaust Gas Caution .............................................. 232 Floor Console .................................................................. 43 Gross Axle Weight Rating............................................. 107
Fails To Start ..............................................................70 Fluid Capacities ............................................................297 Guidance Settings ........................................................ 173
Flooded, Starting .......................................................70 Fluid Leaks ....................................................................232 GVWR ............................................................................ 106
Fuel Requirements ................................................. 295 Fluid Level Checks
Jump Starting.......................................................... 242 Engine Oil.................................................................254
Oil.................................................................... 255, 297 H
Fluid, Brake ...................................................................298 Hazard Warning Flashers............................................. 233
Oil Filler Cap ............................................................ 253 Fog Lights ........................................................................ 34
Oil Filter ................................................................... 256 Head Restraints.............................................................. 28
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................................ 24 Head Rests ..................................................................... 28
Oil Selection ................................................... 255, 297 Forward Collision Warning ................................. 199, 202
Oil Synthetic ............................................................ 255 Headlights
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................................245 Automatic .................................................................. 33
Overheating............................................................. 244 Fuel................................................................................295
Starting .......................................................................70 Automatic High Beam ............................................... 33
Adding ......................................................................106 Cleaning................................................................... 292
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............. 219, 248
Ethanol.......................................................................... 295
Additives...................................................................296 Delay .......................................................................... 34 11
Clean Air...................................................................295 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...................... 33
Exhaust Gas Cautions.................................................. 232 Ethanol .....................................................................295
Exhaust System................................................... 232, 258 Lights On Reminder .................................................. 34
308
Passing .......................................................................33 J Leaks, Fluid................................................................... 232

Switch .........................................................................32 Jack Location ................................................................237 Life Of Tires................................................................... 286
Time Delay..................................................................34 Jack Operation .................................................... 236, 237 Liftgate ..................................................................... 50, 51
Heated Mirrors ................................................................32 Jacking And Tire Changing ...........................................236 Closing ....................................................................... 51
Heated Seats...................................................................27 Jacking And Tire Changing — If Equipped S.............236 Opening...................................................................... 50
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ...........33 Jacking Instructions......................................................237 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .................................... 38
Hill Descent Control ..................................................... 197 Jump Starting................................................................242 Light Bulbs .................................................................... 232
Hill Descent Control Indicator ..................................... 197 Lights............................................................................. 232
Hill Start Assist ............................................................. 198 Air Bag......................................................61, 214, 231
K
Hitches Automatic Headlights ............................................... 33
Key Fob
Trailer Towing.......................................................... 108 Automatic High Beam ............................................... 33
Arm The Alarm ........................................................... 19
Hood Prop........................................................................48 Brake Assist Warning.............................................. 197
Disarm The Alarm...................................................... 19
Hood Release ..................................................................48 Brake Warning........................................................... 62
Keyless Entry .............................................................20
Cruise.................................................................. 67, 68
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........................... 15
I Daytime Running....................................................... 33
Remote Keyless Entry ............................................... 13
Ignition .............................................................................15 Dimmer Switch, Headlight........................................ 33
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ......... 14
Switch .........................................................................15 Exterior..................................................................... 232
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ............ 15
Inside Rearview Mirror.......................................... 30, 233 Fog ............................................................................. 34
Keyless Enter 'n Go™ ..................................................... 20
Instrument Cluster ............................................55, 58, 67 Hazard Warning Flasher ......................................... 233
Enter The Trunk ......................................................... 20
Descriptions ...............................................................68 Headlight Switch ....................................................... 32
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors.......................................... 20
Display Controls .........................................................57 Headlights.................................................................. 32
Passive Entry .............................................................20
Engine Oil Reset.........................................................58 Headlights On Reminder .......................................... 34
Passive Entry Programming...................................... 20
Menu Items ................................................................58 High Beam ................................................................. 33
Remote Control.......................................................... 20
Instrument Cluster S ...................................................57 High Beam/Low Beam Select .................................. 33
Unlock From The Driver’s Side ................................. 20
Instrument Cluster Display .............................................57 Hill Descent Control Indicator ................................ 197
Unlock From The Passenger’s Side.......................... 20
Trip..............................................................................61 Instrument Cluster .................................................... 32
Keyless Entry................................................................... 13
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................................. 293 Intensity Control ........................................................ 35
Keys ................................................................................. 13
Interior Appearance Care ............................................ 293 Interior ....................................................................... 35
Interior Lights ..................................................................35 Lights On Reminder .................................................. 34
L Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..................... 64
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)................................37
Lane Change And Turn Signals...................................... 34 Park............................................................................ 67
Introduction .................................................................. 178
LaneSense ....................................................................101 Passing ...................................................................... 33
Inverter
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................................210 Seat Belt Reminder................................................... 63
Power..........................................................................45
Latches..........................................................................232 Security Alarm ........................................................... 63
Lead Free Gasoline.......................................................295 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........................... 205
309
Traction Control ...................................................... 197 Modifications/Alterations Materials Added To ................................................. 255

Turn Signals ....................................... 34, 67, 68, 232 Vehicle.......................................................................... 8 Pressure Warning Light ............................................ 63
Vanity Mirror...............................................................31 Monitor, Tire Pressure System.....................................205 Recommendation...........................................255, 297
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions..63, 67, 68 Mopar Parts ..................................................................301 Synthetic.................................................................. 255
Loading Vehicle............................................................ 106 Viscosity................................................................... 297
Tires ......................................................................... 281 N Onboard Diagnostic System .......................................... 68
Locks Navigation Operating Navigation ................................................... 157
Child Protection .........................................................22 Before Route Guidance...........................................167 Operating Precautions ................................................... 68
Power Door.................................................................20 Map Updates ...........................................................176 Operator Manual
Low Tire Pressure System ........................................... 205 Navigation Mode...........................................................157 Owner's Manual ...................................................... 302
Lubrication, Body ......................................................... 256 Navigation, Emergency.................................................176 Outside Rearview Mirrors .............................................. 31
Lug Nuts ....................................................................... 294 Navigation, Information Menu .....................................175 Overheating, Engine ..................................................... 244
Luggage Carrier...............................................................53 Navigation, View Map................................ 169, 170, 173
Navigation, P
M Where To? .............158, 160, 162, 164, 165, 166, 167 Paint Care ..................................................................... 292
Main Menu .......................................................... 158, 169 New Vehicle Break-In Period.......................................... 71 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone S .. 145
Maintenance ...................................................................48 Parking Brake ................................................................. 72
Maintenance Free Battery........................................... 254 O ParkSense
Maintenance Schedule................................................ 249 Occupant Restraints.....................................................208 Front And Rear .......................................................... 91
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ...........64, 69 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......................... 295, 297 ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................................ 97
Manage My Account .................................................... 188 Oil Change Indicator ....................................................... 58 Personalized Main Menu Bar ...................................... 131
Manual Reset .......................................................................... 58 Pets ............................................................................... 230
Service..................................................................... 302 Oil Change Reset S...................................................... 58 Phone ............................................................................ 167
Map Setup Settings ..................................................... 170 Oil Filter, Change ..........................................................256 Phone Mode ................................................................. 143
Master Cylinder Oil Filter, Selection........................................................256 Placard, Tire And Loading Information ....................... 281
Brakes ..................................................................... 261 Oil Pressure Light............................................................ 63 Point of Interest............................................................ 162
Media Mode ................................................................. 141 Oil, Engine ........................................................... 255, 297 All Points of Interest................................................ 163
Methanol ...................................................................... 295 Capacity ...................................................................297 Restaurants............................................................. 164
Mirrors Checking ..................................................................254 Spell Name .............................................................. 163
Heated........................................................................32 Dipstick ....................................................................254 Point on Map ................................................................ 165
Outside .......................................................................31 Disposal ...................................................................255 Power
Rearview........................................................... 30, 233 Filter .........................................................................256 Brakes...................................................................... 294 11
Vanity ..........................................................................31 Filter Disposal..........................................................255 Door Locks................................................................. 20
Mobile App.................................................................... 179 Identification Logo...................................................255 Inverter ...................................................................... 45
310
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .............................44 Remote Control Saved Radio Stations................................................... 139
Sunroof.......................................................................47 Starting System ......................................................... 16 Schedule, Maintenance............................................... 249
Windows .....................................................................46 Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock................ 183, 188 Search........................................................................... 160
Power Seats Remote Features, Horn And Lights .............................184 Seat Belt Reminder ........................................................ 63
Recline........................................................................26 Remote Features, Starting................................. 183, 190 Seat Belts.............................................................209, 231
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts................................ 212 Remote Keyless Entry ....................................................13 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage.................. 212
Preparation For Jacking............................................... 236 Arm The Alarm ........................................................... 19 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage.......... 212
Presets.......................................................................... 139 Disarm The Alarm...................................................... 19 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........................ 213
Pretensioners Keyless Enter 'n Go™ ................................................ 20 Child Restraints....................................................... 221
Seat Belts................................................................ 213 Programming Additional Key Fobs ........................... 15 Energy Management Feature................................. 213
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control.......................132 Front Seat ............................................. 209, 210, 211
R Remote Starting Inspection................................................................ 231
Radial Ply Tires............................................................. 285 Uconnect Customer Programmable Features ......... 17 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................................. 211
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)......................... 260 Uconnect Settings ..................................................... 17 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................ 212
Radio Remote Starting System ................................................ 16 Lap/Shoulder Belts................................................. 210
Presets..................................................................... 139 Replacement Tires........................................................286 Operating Instructions ............................................ 211
Radio Controls.............................................................. 132 Reporting Safety Defects .............................................301 Pregnant Women .................................................... 212
Radio Mode .................................................................. 132 Restraints, Child ...........................................................221 Pretensioners .......................................................... 213
Radio Operation .................................................. 132, 192 Restraints, Head .............................................................28 Rear Seat................................................................. 210
Radio Remote Controls................................................ 132 Roadside Assistance .......................................... 184, 189 Reminder ................................................................. 209
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .........................................37 Roll Over Warning ............................................................. 8 Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................ 213
Rear Camera ................................................................ 105 Roof Type Carrier ............................................................ 53 Seat Belt Reminder................................................. 209
Rear Cross Path ........................................................... 201 Rotation, Tires...............................................................290 Untwisting Procedure.............................................. 212
Rear ParkSense System .................................................91 Seat Belts Maintenance .............................................. 293
Rear Window Defroster ..................................................38 S Seats ............................................................................... 24
Rear Wiper/Washer ........................................................38 Safety.............................................................................131 Adjustment ................................................................ 24
Rearview Mirror...............................................................30 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .......................................231 Head Restraints ........................................................ 28
Reclining Front Seats......................................................24 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................................232 Heated ....................................................................... 27
Recreational Towing .................................................... 112 Safety Defects, Reporting ............................................301 Rear Folding .............................................................. 24
Reformulated Gasoline................................................ 295 Safety Features.............................................................131 Reclining .................................................................... 24
Refrigerant.................................................................... 256 Safety Information, Tire................................................278 Seatback Release ..................................................... 24
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ................................... 178 Safety Tips.....................................................................230 Tilting ......................................................................... 24
Reminder, Lights On .......................................................34 Safety, Exhaust Gas......................................................232 Security Alarm ......................................................... 18, 63
Reminder, Seat Belt..................................................... 209 Satellite Radio...............................................................136 Arm The System ........................................................ 19
Disarm The System................................................... 19
311
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)................................ 297 Engine Fails To Start ................................................. 70 Tire Service Kit Storage S ......................................... 240
Send & Go ........................................................... 185, 189 Remote....................................................................... 16 Tires................................................... 232, 284, 288, 290
Service Assistance ....................................................... 299 Starting And Operating ................................................... 70 Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................................. 286
Service Contract........................................................... 301 Starting Procedures........................................................ 70 Air Pressure ............................................................. 284
Service Manuals........................................................... 302 Steering Chains ...................................................................... 289
Settings......................................................................... 169 Tilt Column................................................................. 23 Changing.................................................................. 236
Settings, Audio ............................................................. 140 Wheel, Heated ........................................................... 23 Compact Spare........................................................ 288
Shift Lever Override ..................................................... 245 Wheel, Tilt .................................................................. 23 General Information.......................................284, 288
Shoulder Belts.............................................................. 210 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................................132 High Speed .............................................................. 285
Side Distance Warning System......................................95 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ....................132 Inflation Pressure.................................................... 284
Side View Mirror Adjustment..........................................31 Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................................. 186, 189 Jacking..................................................................... 236
Signals, Turn............................................ 34, 67, 68, 232 Storage ............................................................................ 43 Life Of Tires ............................................................. 286
Sirius Satellite Radio ................................................... 136 Storage, Vehicle.............................................................. 42 Load Capacity.................................................281, 282
Favorites.................................................................. 138 Store Radio Presets......................................................139 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .............. 65, 205
Replay...................................................................... 137 Stuck, Freeing ...............................................................245 Quality Grading........................................................ 290
SiriusXM Traffic....................................................... 177 Sun Roof................................................................... 47, 48 Radial....................................................................... 285
SiriusXM Travel Link ............................................... 177 Opening...................................................................... 47 Replacement ........................................................... 286
Traffic & Weather.................................................... 138 Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag..................215 Rotation ................................................................... 290
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Sway Control, Trailer........................................... 108, 198 Safety..............................................................278, 284
Browse in SXM ........................................................ 138 Symbol Glossary ............................................................... 9 Sizes......................................................................... 279
Favorites.................................................................. 138 Synthetic Engine Oil......................................................255 Snow Tires ............................................................... 287
Replay...................................................................... 137 System, Remote Starting ............................................... 16 Spare Tires .............................................................. 288
Traffic and Weather................................................ 138 Spinning................................................................... 285
Smart Watch................................................................. 188 T Trailer Towing .......................................................... 110
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)........................................... 289 Telescoping Steering Column ........................................ 23 Tread Wear Indicators ............................................ 286
Snow Tires .................................................................... 287 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ......................... 41 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight..................................... 109
SOS Call ............................................................... 180, 188 Tilt Steering Column ....................................................... 23 Tow Hooks
Spare Tires ................................................................... 288 Time Delay Emergency............................................................... 247
Specifications Headlight.................................................................... 34 Towing ........................................................................... 107
Fuel (Gasoline)........................................................ 297 Tip Start ........................................................................... 70 Disabled Vehicle...................................................... 246
Oil............................................................................. 297 Tire And Loading Information Placard.........................281 Guide........................................................................ 109
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......................................82 Recreational ............................................................ 112
Starting ............................................................................70
Tire Markings ................................................................278
Weight...................................................................... 109 11
Tire Safety Information.................................................278
Button.........................................................................15 Tire Service Kit..............................................................240 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ........................................... 198
Cold Weather .............................................................71
312
Trailer Towing ............................................................... 107 Join Calls ..................................................................150 Vehicle Loading ...................................................106, 282
Hitches .................................................................... 108 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite .........147 Vehicle Maintenance ................................................... 255
Minimum Requirements ........................................ 109 Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................................8
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................................... 109 Progress ..............................................................149 Vehicle Notifications .................................................... 187
Wiring....................................................................... 111 Managing Your Favorites ........................................147 Vehicle Storage............................................................... 42
Trailer Towing Guide .................................................... 109 Natural Speech........................................................144 Voice Command ...........................................29, 153, 155
Trailer Weight ............................................................... 109 Operation .................................................................144 Voice Recognition System (VR) ..................................... 29
Transmission Overview...................................................................143
Automatic ......................................................... 74, 261 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone....145 W
Fluid ......................................................................... 298 Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device..............146 Warning Flashers, Hazard............................................ 233
Transporting Pets......................................................... 230 Phonebook Download .............................................147 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) ....... 67
Tread Wear Indicators ................................................. 286 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ............................149 Warnings And Cautions.................................................. 61
Trips .............................................................................. 164 Power-Up..................................................................152 Warnings, Roll Over...........................................................8
Turn Signals.......................................................34, 67, 68 Recent Calls.............................................................148 Warranty Information ................................................... 301
Redial .......................................................................150 Washer
U To Remove A Favorite .............................................148 Adding Fluid............................................................. 254
Uconnect Toggling Between Calls ...........................................150 Washing Vehicle ........................................................... 292
Phone Call Features ............................................... 148 Touch-Tone Number Entry ......................................148 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ......................................... 288
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..............150 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim.......................................... 288
Phone ................................................................. 150 Voice Command ......................................................150 Wi-Fi............................................................................... 185
Uconnect Settings............................................ 17, 117 Uconnect Settings Wind Buffeting................................................................ 47
Uconnect Phone.........................................144, 145, 146 Customer Programmable Features..........17, 22, 117 Window Fogging ............................................................. 42
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Passive Entry Programming....................................124 Windows
Call Currently In Progress.................................. 149 Uconnect System..........................................................129 Power ......................................................................... 46
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Uniform Tire Quality Grades.........................................290 Windshield Defroster ................................................... 231
No Call Currently In Progress............................ 149 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector............ 44 Windshield Wiper Blades............................................. 257
Bluetooth Communication Link ............................. 152 Unleaded Gasoline .......................................................295 Wipers Blade Replacement ......................................... 257
Call Continuation .................................................... 150 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt..................................212 Wipers, Intermittent ....................................................... 37
Call Controls ............................................................ 148 Wipers, Rain Sensitive ................................................... 37
Call Termination...................................................... 150 V Wrecker Towing ............................................................ 246
Cancel Command ................................................... 145 Vanity Mirrors.................................................................. 31
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Vehicle Finder ..................................................... 185, 189
Audio Device After Pairing ................................ 146 Vehicle Health Alert ......................................................187
Help Command ....................................................... 144 Vehicle Health Report...................................................186
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention
equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while
additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle
is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
common questions.
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE local Jeep® brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE. 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA) Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA) purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area drinking. Never drink and then drive.
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
2023 R EN EGA DE | OWNER’S MANUAL
2023 RENEGADE
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
USA Canada
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une First Edition
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 23_BV_OM_EN_USC

2023 Jeep Renegade

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 Jeep Renegade

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 Jeep Renegade

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 R EN EGA DE | OWNER’S MANUAL

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................55 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 70 4

5 MULTIMEDIA ................................................................................................................................ 116 5

6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 193 6

INTRODUCTION STEERING WHEEL............................................................... 23 Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................. 34

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............................................ 299 WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................301

SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Oil Pressure Warning Light

Oil Pressure Sensor Failure Warning Light

Oil Temperature Warning Light

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Transmission Fault Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Audio System Failure Warning Light Service 4WD Warning Light

LaneSense Warning Light Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light

Low Fuel Warning Light Transmission Temperature Warning Light

Service LaneSense Warning Light 4WD Over Temperature Warning Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

4WD Lock Indicator Light

Cruise Control Set Indicator Light

Front Fog Indicator Light

Hazard Warning Indicator Lights

Parking/Headlight On Indicator Light

Sport Mode Indicator Light

Stop/Start Active Indicator Light

Green Indicator Lights Blue Indicator Lights

Turn Signal Indicator Lights High Beam Indicator Light

White Indicator Lights Gray Indicator Lights

Idle Coasting Indicator Light

Light Sensor Failure Indicator Light

Speed Warning Indicator Light

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The push button ignition can be placed in the following

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

HOW TO U SE R EMOTE S TART  Panic button not pushed NOTE:

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

NOTE: HEATED S TEERING WHEEL —

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! MANUAL F RONT S EATS 1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar

SEATS Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward

Manual Seat Adjustment Levers

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

WARNING!  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29